Cadillac 2008 XLR-V Specifications

Cadillac 2008 XLR-V Specifications
2008 Cadillac XLR/XLR-V Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-6
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-23
Airbag System
......................................... 1-36
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-52
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-10
Windows ................................................. 2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-19
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-23
Mirrors .................................................... 2-36
Object Detection Systems .......................... 2-38
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-41
Universal Home Remote System
................ 2-44
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-52
Retractable Hardtop .................................. 2-54
M
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-38
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators ............................................. 3-43
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-60
Trip Computer
......................................... 3-80
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-81
Navigation System .......................................... 4-1
Overview
.................................................. 4-2
Features and Controls
.............................. 4-11
Navigation Audio System ........................... 4-54
Voice Recognition
.................................... 4-76
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle .......................................... 5-2
Towing
................................................... 5-27
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 6-1
Service ..................................................... 6-3
Fuel ......................................................... 6-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 6-10
Rear Axle
............................................... 6-46
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 6-47
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 6-50
Windshield Replacement
........................... 6-50
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 6-50
Tires
...................................................... 6-52
Appearance Care
..................................... 6-80
Vehicle Identification
................................. 6-89
Electrical System ...................................... 6-89
Capacities and Specifications
..................... 6-97
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 7-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 7-2
Customer Assistance Information .................... 8-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 8-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 8-15
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
........... 8-17
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CADILLAC,
the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath, and the name XLR are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time to the product without notice. For vehicles
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car
Division whenever it appears in this manual.
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
Helm Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
This manual describes features that may be available in
this model, but your vehicle may not have all of them.
For example, more than one entertainment system may
be offered or your vehicle may have been ordered
without a front passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15865987 A First Printing
©
2007 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Using this Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle to learn
about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures
and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is
an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and
the page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to
ignore the warning.
iv
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do Not do
this” or “Do Not let this
happen.”
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-2
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-2
Heated and Cooled Seats ................................1-3
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel .........1-3
Power Reclining Seatbacks ..............................1-4
Safety Belts .....................................................1-6
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-6
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-11
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-20
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-22
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-23
Child Restraints .............................................1-23
Older Children ..............................................1-23
Infants and Young Children ............................1-26
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-30
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) ..................................................1-32
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ............................................1-32
Airbag System ...............................................1-36
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-39
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-41
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-43
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-43
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? .........................................1-44
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-45
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-50
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-51
Restraint System Check ..................................1-52
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-52
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-53
1-1
Front Seats
Power Lumbar
Power Seats
The power seat controls
are located on the
outboard side of the seat
cushions.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
horizontal control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the horizontal control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the horizontal control up or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
horizontal control up or down.
• Use the vertical control to recline the seatback.
See Power Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-4.
1-2
The driver’s and
passenger’s seatback
lumbar support switches
are located on the
outboard sides of the
seats.
Use the power seat controls first to get the proper
position, then continue with the lumbar adjustment.
Use the top lumbar switch to adjust support to the
middle seatback and the bottom lumbar switch to adjust
support to the lower seatback. Press the front of the
switch to increase support and the rear of the switch to
decrease support.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,
as it may during long trips, so should the position of your
lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
Heated and Cooled Seats
The buttons for the heated and cooled seats are located
on the climate control system.
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Wheel
( (Heated/Cooled Seat):
Press this button to turn the
feature on. The button on the left controls the driver’s
seat and the button on the right controls the passenger’s
seat. Each press of the button will take you to a
different setting. The settings available in order are
HI HEAT, LO HEAT, OFF, HI COOL, LO COOL
and OFF. You will be able to feel the temperature
change in a few minutes.
The feature will automatically turn off when the vehicle
is turned off. See Dual Climate Control System on
page 3-38 for more information.
Your vehicle is equipped with the memory package.
The controls for these features are located on the
driver’s seat, and are used to program and recall
memory settings for the driver’s seating positions.
Use the following steps to program each button:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat including the seatback
recliner, lumbar, both outside mirrors and the
steering wheel to a comfortable position.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps are
heard, then release the button.
1-3
A second mirror, seating and steering wheel position
can be programmed by repeating the above steps and
pressing button 2 (for driver 2). Each time a memory
button is pressed and released, a single beep will sound.
Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released while
the vehicle is in PARK (P), the memory positions will be
recalled after a brief delay. If the vehicle is not in
PARK (P), three beeps will be heard and the memory
position will not be recalled.
When the engine is started, the seat, mirrors, and
steering wheel may automatically adjust to their
programmed positions.
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any
time, press one of the power seat controls, power
mirror control buttons, memory buttons, or power
steering column control.
Two personalized exit positions can be set by first
recalling the driving position (by pressing 1 or 2), then
positioning the steering wheel and seat in the desired
exit positions and then pressing and holding the
exit button until two beeps are heard. The exit button is
located between buttons 1 and 2. With the vehicle in
PARK (P), the exit position for the previously set driver
can be recalled by pressing the exit button.
When you use the keyless access transmitter to unlock
your vehicle, automatic seat and steering wheel
movement to the exit position may occur. The numbers
on the back of the transmitter, 1 and 2, corresponds
to the numbers on the memory buttons.
1-4
Further programming for automatic seat and mirror
movement can be done using the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-76.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
Your seats have power
reclining seatbacks.
Use the vertical power seat control located on the
outboard side of the seat to operate them.
• To recline the seatback, press the control toward
the rear of the vehicle.
• To raise the seatback, press the control toward the
front of the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-5
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
1-6
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-46.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-7
Put someone on it.
1-8
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-9
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if
I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-10
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-23
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-26. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
1-11
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
1-12
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-13
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is
too loose. In a crash, you could slide under
the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give as much
protection this way.
1-14
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not on the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-15
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-16
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt.
The belt force would then be applied right on
the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-19
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the
belt go back all the way and start again.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature may
affect the passenger sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-45.
1-20
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-23.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
1-21
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are
met. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags, safety
belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in
a side crash.
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-53.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
1-22
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you
go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else
use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit.
The extender has been designed for adults. Never use
it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-23
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, then
return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
1-24
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in rear seating positions
than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-25
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
1-26
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their
neck and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle
and never allow children to play with the
safety belts.
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly
can strike other people, or can be thrown out of the
vehicle. In addition, young children should not use the
vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need to use
a child restraint.
1-27
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
{CAUTION:
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-28
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
should always be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that is unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
injuries. Young children should always be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
1-29
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
1-30
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Because there are different
systems, it is important to refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint. Make
sure the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that restraint.
1-31
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Some child restraints have a LATCH system. As part of
the LATCH system, your child restraint may have
lower attachments and/or a top tether. The LATCH
system can help hold the child restraint in place during
driving or in a crash. Some vehicles have lower
and/or top tether anchors designed to secure a child
restraint with lower attachments and/or a top tether.
Some child restraints with a top tether are designed to
be used whether the top tether is anchored or not.
Other child restraints require that the top tether
be anchored. A national or local law may require that
the top tether be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Your vehicle does not have lower anchors or top tether
anchors to secure a child restraint with the LATCH
system. If a national or local law requires that your top
tether be anchored, do not use a child restraint in
this vehicle because a top tether cannot be properly
1-32
anchored. You must use the safety belts to secure
your child restraint in this vehicle, unless a national or
local law requires that the top tether be anchored.
Refer to your child restraint instructions and instructions
in this manual for securing a child restraint using the
vehicle’s safety belts.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. In addition, your vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which is designed to turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag under certain
conditions. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-45 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-47 for more information on this, including
important safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-45
for additional information.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-32
for how to install your child restraint using LATCH. If you
secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a
top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-32 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator
on the passenger airbag status indicator should light
and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-47.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-33
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-34
If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on
when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a child restraint
in this vehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-35
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
•
•
•
•
A frontal airbag for the driver.
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
1-36
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can
be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you
would be if you were sitting on the edge of
your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help
keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of your
vehicle. They are not designed to inflate in
frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with seat-mounted airbags.
1-37
{CAUTION:
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
Older Children on page 1-23 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-26.
1-38
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-46
for more information.
Where Are the Airbags?
The passenger’s frontal airbag is in the instrument panel
on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-39
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
1-40
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
1-41
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during
vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags.
See Airbag System on page 1-36. Seat-mounted
side impact airbags are intended to inflate in moderate
to severe side crashes. Seat-mounted side impact
airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above
the system’s designed threshold level. The threshold
level can vary with specific vehicle design.
1-42
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers,
or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle
that is struck.
Your vehicle has seat position sensors which enables
the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s
seat and the right front passenger’s seat. Seat position
sensors provide information that is used to determine
if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at
full deployment.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair
costs were. For seat-mounted side impact airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity
of the side impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag
causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy.
The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all
part of the airbag module.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to
the door.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted
side impact airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 1-41 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-43
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some
people may not even realize the airbags inflated.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-43.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust
in the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma or
other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone
in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing problems
but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window
or a door. If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn on
the hazard warning flashers when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
1-44
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 8-17 and Event Data Recorders on
page 8-18.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible in the rearview
mirror when you start your vehicle.
United States
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
system. Improper service can mean that the
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-47.
1-45
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag under certain conditions. The driver’s
airbags are not part of the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger’s seat.
The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that rear-facing child restraints
not be transported in your vehicle, even if the airbags
are off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in
a rear seat, even if the airbag(s) are off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go.
It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
1-46
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbags are off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-47.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-32.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the
child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the
seat cushion if possible.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint.
1-47
If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a child restraint
in this vehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the right front passenger’s seat. When the
passenger sensing system has allowed the airbags
to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbags are active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
1-48
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any
additional material from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers
and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully
upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for two to three minutes.
This will allow the system to detect that person and
then enable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. This may unintentionally cause the passenger
sensing system to turn the airbag(s) off for some
adult size occupants. If this happens, just let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
{CAUTION:
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and
“Child Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-46 for more on this, including
important safety information.
1-49
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 1-51 for more information about modifications that
can affect how the system operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-50
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 8-16.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, the inside review mirror, front sensors, or
airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag
system.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position,
which includes sensors that are part of the
passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the original seat trim
is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim,
or with GM covers, upholstery or trim designed
for a different vehicle. Any object, such as an
aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad
or device, installed under or on top of the seat
fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the
passenger sensing system. This could either
prevent proper deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-45.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on
page 8-2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8-2.
Your dealer/retailer and the service manual have
information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
1-51
Restraint System Check
Airbags
Checking the Restraint Systems
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-46 for more information.
Safety Belts
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or
frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-46 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 6-83.
1-52
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings.
If there are any opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or airbag module
replaced. For the location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-43.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any crash
may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt was not being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, or if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle or while
you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 3-46.
1-53
✍ NOTES
1-54
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Keyless Access System ...................................2-5
Keyless Access System Operation ....................2-6
Doors and Locks ............................................2-10
Door Locks ..................................................2-10
Power Door Locks ........................................2-12
Automatic Door Lock .....................................2-12
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .............2-12
Lockout Protection ........................................2-12
Trunk ..........................................................2-13
Windows ........................................................2-16
Power Windows ............................................2-17
Sun Visors ...................................................2-19
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-19
Theft-Deterrent System ..................................2-19
Valet Lockout Switch .....................................2-21
Immobilizer ..................................................2-21
Immobilizer Operation ....................................2-22
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-23
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-23
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-23
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-24
Starting the Engine .......................................2-24
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-26
Parking Brake ..............................................2-30
Shifting Into PARK (P) ...................................2-32
Shifting Out of PARK (P) ...............................2-33
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-34
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-34
Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-35
Mirrors ...........................................................2-36
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® ............................................2-36
Outside Power Heated Mirrors ........................2-36
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-37
Park Assist Mirror .........................................2-37
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-38
Object Detection Systems ...............................2-38
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ..............2-38
OnStar® System .............................................2-41
Universal Home Remote System ......................2-44
Universal Home Remote System .....................2-44
Universal Home Remote System Operation
(With Three Round LED) ............................2-45
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
Storage Areas ................................................2-52
Glove Box ...................................................2-52
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-52
Center Console Storage .................................2-52
Floor Mats ...................................................2-52
2-2
Rear Storage Area ........................................2-53
Convenience Net ..........................................2-53
Retractable Hardtop ........................................2-54
Lowering the Retractable Hardtop ...................2-54
Raising the Retractable Hardtop ......................2-55
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keyless
access transmitter is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls or even make
the vehicle move. The windows will function
with the keyless access transmitter in the
vehicle and they could be seriously injured
or killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keyless access
transmitter in a vehicle with children.
2-3
This key, located inside
the keyless access
transmitter, can be used
for the glove box and
the trunk, if vehicle power
is lost. See Trunk on
page 2-13 for more
information.
To remove the key, press
the button (A) near the
bottom of the keyless
access transmitter, and
pull the key out. Never pull
the key out without
pressing the button.
Your vehicle has a keyless access system with
pushbutton start. See Ignition Positions on page 2-23
for information on starting the vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lose your transmitter(s) and/or
key, it could be difficult to get into your vehicle.
You may even have to damage your vehicle to get
in. Be sure you have a spare transmitter and/or key.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Service on page 8-7.
2-4
Keyless Access System
Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System that
operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If you ever notice a decrease in the keyless access
transmitter range, try doing one of the following:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Keyless Access System Operation on page 2-6.
• Check to make sure that an electronic device such
as a cellular phone or lap top computer is not
causing interference.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
2-5
Keyless Access System Operation
Q (Lock):
Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System that allows
you to lock and unlock your doors, unlock your trunk lid
and disarm or arm your theft-deterrent system. The range
distance is as much as 100 feet (30 m) away.
K (Unlock):
Press this button to lock the doors. The
indicator light on the door will flash once. If this button is
pressed twice, the doors will lock, the light will flash
once and the horn will sound once.
Press this button once to unlock the
driver’s door. The indicator light on the door will flash
twice. Press the button twice within 10 seconds to
unlock both doors. If it is dark enough outside, your
interior lamps will come on.
Your memory settings may also be recalled when
you press the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Wheel on page 1-3 for more information.
G (Trunk):
Press and hold this button for about
one second to open the trunk while the engine is turned
off or the shift lever is in PARK (P).
Your vehicle comes with two transmitters, and up to
four can be matched to your vehicle. See “Matching
Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” later in this section.
2-6
L (Panic):
Press this button to sound the vehicle
alarm. Press any other button on the keyless access
transmitter to stop the vehicle alarm.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each keyless access transmitter is coded to prevent
another transmitter from working with your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer/retailer. Remember
to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you
go to your dealer/retailer. Once your dealer/retailer
has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will
not work with your vehicle. Each vehicle can have
a maximum of four transmitters matched to it.
To match a new transmitter to your vehicle when you
have a recognized transmitter: Two recognized
transmitters are required for Canadian owners.
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Have the recognized and new, unrecognized
transmitters on your person.
3. Go to the rear of the vehicle and insert the vehicle
key into the key cylinder located on the lower
rear fascia on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See Trunk on page 2-13 for more information on
the key cylinder.
4. Open the trunk.
5. Turn the key five times within five seconds.
6. The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display
READY FOR FOB #X. X can be 2, 3 or 4.
7. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter in the
glove box transmitter pocket with the buttons
facing to the right.
8. Once the transmitter is programmed, a beep will
sound. The DIC will display READY FOR #X,
where X can be 3 or 4, or MAX # FOBS LEARNED.
9. Press the Acc. button.
2-7
The Canadian immobilizer standard requires Canadian
owners to see their dealer/retailer for matching new
transmitters when two recognized transmitters are not
available. United States owners are permitted to match a
new transmitter to their vehicle when a recognized
transmitter is not available. The procedure will require
three ten minute cycles to complete the matching
process. Do the following:
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter in the
glove box transmitter pocket with the buttons
facing to the right.
2-8
3. Go to the rear of the vehicle and insert the vehicle
key into the key cylinder located on the lower
rear fascia on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See Trunk on page 2-13 for more information on
the key cylinder.
4. Open the trunk.
5. Turn the key five times within five seconds.
6. The DIC message will display OFF-ACC TO LEARN.
7. Press the Acc. button.
8. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will
count down to zero, one minute at a time.
9. The DIC will display OFF-ACC TO LEARN again.
10. Press the Acc. button.
11. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will
count down to zero, one minute at a time.
12. The DIC will display OFF-ACC TO LEARN again.
13. Press the Acc. button.
14. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will
count down to zero, one minute at a time.
15. A beep will sound and the DIC will read READY
FOR FOB #1. At this time, all previously known
transmitters have been erased.
16. Once the transmitter is recognized and
programmed, a beep will sound and the DIC will
display READY FOR FOB #2.
If you have additional transmitters to program, take
transmitter 1 out of the transmitter pocket and place
transmitter 2 in the pocket. This can be done repeatedly
until up to four transmitters have been programmed.
The DIC will then display MAX # FOBS LEARNED and
will exit the programming mode.
When you are done programming transmitters, press
the Acc. button.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your keyless access
transmitter should last about three years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery.
A weak battery may also cause the DIC to display
NO FOB DETECTED when you try to start the vehicle.
If this happens, place the transmitter in the glove box
transmitter pocket with the buttons facing to the right.
Then, with the vehicle in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N),
press the brake pedal and the START button. Although
this will start the vehicle, it is recommended that you
replace the transmitter battery as soon as possible.
The DIC may display FOB BATTERY LOW.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the slot on
the side of the transmitter and separate the bottom
half from the top half.
2. Gently pull the battery out of the transmitter.
3. Put the new battery in the transmitter, positive (+)
side down. Use a battery, type CR2032, or
equivalent.
4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure to put it
together so water will not get in.
5. Test the transmitter.
2-9
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked it
will not open. You increase the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash
if the doors are not locked. So, wear safety
belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
To lock or unlock your vehicle from the outside, use the
keyless access transmitter and press the appropriate
lock or unlock button. You may also unlock and open the
door passively when you squeeze the door handle
sensor, as long as you have your transmitter with you.
Passive entry occurs when the door handle sensor
is pressed and the vehicle recognizes your keyless
access transmitter. When the passenger door is opened
first, the driver’s door will also become unlocked.
From the inside, use the power door lock buttons located
at the top of the door panel near the window. See
Power Door Locks on page 2-12 for more information.
To open a door from the inside, press the button in front
of the door handle and push the door open.
2-10
If power to the vehicle or the keyless access transmitter
is lost, there are two ways to open the door.
If you are inside the vehicle, use the door release
handle located on the floor next to each seat.
Pull the handle up to unlock and unlatch the door.
If you are outside the vehicle, there is a door release tab
in the trunk. The tab is located behind a panel on the
driver’s side of the trunk. Pull the handle to unlock and
unlatch the driver’s door. See Trunk on page 2-13 for
information on opening the trunk during a loss of power.
2-11
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the doors.
Programmable Automatic
Door Unlock
There is an indicator light on the rear of the door
near the window.
Your vehicle is programmed so that, when the shift
lever is moved into PARK (P), both doors will unlock.
K (Unlock):
With the vehicle in PARK (P) and the engine running,
door unlocking can be programmed through prompts
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
These prompts allow the driver to choose various
unlock settings. For programming information,
see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-76.
Press to unlock the doors.
When pressed, a beep sounds. If the door is closed
when pressed, the light flashes twice. If the door is
open when pressed, the light flashes.
Q (Lock):
Press to lock the doors.
When pressed, a beep sounds. If the door is closed
when pressed, the light comes on for a few seconds,
then turns off. If the door is open when pressed,
the light stays on.
Automatic Door Lock
Your vehicle is programmed so that, when the doors are
closed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved
out of PARK (P), all the doors will lock.
If someone needs to get out while the vehicle is not in
PARK (P), have the person use the power door unlock
switch. When the door is closed again, the doors will lock
either when your foot is removed from the brake or the
vehicle speed becomes faster than 8 mph (13 km/h).
2-12
Lockout Protection
Your vehicle can be programmed to sound the horn
three times and unlock the driver’s door when both
doors are closed and there is a keyless access
transmitter inside the vehicle. When the driver’s door
is opened, a reminder chime will sound continuously.
The vehicle will remain locked only when at least
one transmitter has been removed from the vehicle
and both doors are closed. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-76.
Trunk
Trunk Lock Release
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
Moving parts of the powered trunk lid can be
dangerous. You or others could be injured.
Keep yourself and others away from the trunk
lid and its mechanism while it is closing.
The trunk lock release
button is located to the
left of the steering wheel
on the instrument panel.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-34.
Press the button to open the trunk. To use this feature,
your vehicle must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
and the valet lockout switch must be off.
2-13
You can also press the button with the trunk symbol
on the keyless access transmitter to open the trunk.
To disable this feature, see “Valet Lockout Switch”
under Theft-Deterrent Systems on page 2-19.
You may passively enter the trunk when you squeeze
the trunk release sensor located on the rear of the
trunk lid under the emblem, as long as you have your
transmitter with you. The vehicle must be in PARK
(P) and the valet lockout switch must be off.
See Valet Lockout Switch on page 2-21.
To close the trunk,
press the button
on the underside
of the trunk lid.
To stop the trunk lid while it is closing, do one of the
following:
• Press the trunk lock release button located on
the instrument panel.
• Use the vehicle key.
• Squeeze the trunk release sensor located on the
rear of the trunk lid.
• Press the button with the trunk symbol on the
keyless access transmitter.
• Press the trunk close button on the underside
of the trunk lid.
To begin opening the trunk from the stopped position,
use any of the methods above, except pressing the trunk
close button.
To resume closing the power trunk lid, press the trunk
close button on the underside of the trunk lid.
If the vehicle has lost battery power, you can still open
the trunk using the vehicle key. See Keys on page 2-3
for more information.
2-14
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
The key cylinder is located behind a cover on the
lower rear fascia on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Open the door to access the key cylinder.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk near the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to light.
Pull the release handle and push up on the trunk
lid to release the latch from the inside.
2-15
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm
or hot weather.
2-16
Power Windows
{CAUTION:
The power window
switches are located
on each door near
the armrest.
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome from extreme heat in
warm or hot weather and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured
or killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with
children.
Press the up or down arrows on the switches to raise
or lower the windows.
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
that allows you to use the power windows once
the ignition has been turned off. For more information,
see Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-24.
When there are children in the rear seat
use the window lockout button to prevent
unintentional operation of the windows.
2-17
Power Window Initialize
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
After a power reconnect such as battery replacement,
the express-up and index-up features will not function
until the system is initialized. Once power is restored,
do the following:
1. Close the door.
2. Raise the window by holding the up arrow on
the power window switch.
3. Hold the up arrow for three seconds after
the window is closed. Release the switch.
Then hold the up arrow again for three seconds.
If any object is in the path of the window when
the express-up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also
cause the window to auto-reverse. The window
will return to normal operation once the obstruction or
condition is removed.
The express-up system must be initialized to operate
the windows with the door open.
If express override is activated, the window will
not reverse automatically. You or others could
be injured and the window could be damaged.
Before you use express override, make sure
that all people and obstructions are clear of the
window path.
Express-Down Window
This feature is on both power windows. Press the
down arrow on the switch to the second position to
activate the express-down feature. If you want to stop
the window as it is lowering, press the switch again.
Express-Up Window
This feature is on both power windows. Press the up
arrow on the switch to the second position to activate
the express-up feature. If you want to stop the window
as it is raising, press the switch again.
2-18
{CAUTION:
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window switch
all the way down in the express position. The window will
rise for as long as the switch is held. Once the switch is
released, the express mode is re-activated.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
Window Indexing
Theft-Deterrent Systems
This feature automatically lowers the window a small
amount when the door is opened. Then, when the door
is closed, the window will raise to its full up position.
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Sun Visors
Notice: Raising or lowering the retractable hardtop
with the visor or the visor vanity mirror cover up,
may cause damage to the visor or mirror cover.
Always return the visor to the center mount or lower
the cover on the visor vanity mirror before raising
or lowering the retractable hardtop.
Swing down the visor to block out glare. It can also
be detached from the center mount and moved to
the side.
Theft-Deterrent System
Your vehicle is equipped with a theft-deterrent alarm
system.
With this system, the
security light will flash
when the door is open and
locked with the power
door lock switch.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors
Swing the visor down and lift the cover. The lamp will
automatically come on when the cover is opened.
If this light is on continuously while the engine is
running, your vehicle needs service.
2-19
Arming the System
Testing the Alarm
To arm the system:
• Press the lock button on the keyless access
transmitter.
• Open the door. Lock the door with the power
door lock switch. The security light should
flash. Remove the keyless access transmitter
from the interior of the vehicle and close the door.
The security light will stop flashing and stay on.
After 30 seconds, the light should turn off.
The vehicle can be programmed to automatically
lock the doors and arm the system when you
exit the vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-76.
To test the system:
1. Make sure the trunk lid is latched.
2. Lower the window on the driver’s door.
3. Manually arm the system.
4. Close the doors and wait 30 seconds.
5. Reach through the open window and manually
pull the release lever on the floor.
6. Turn off the alarm by pressing the unlock button
on the transmitter.
Now, if a door or the trunk lid is opened without the
keyless access transmitter, the alarm will go off. Your
horn will sound for two minutes, then it will go off to save
battery power. And, your vehicle will not start without
a keyless transmitter present.
The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock the
driver’s door with the power door lock switch after
the doors are closed.
If your passenger stays in the vehicle when you leave
with the keyless access transmitter, have the passenger
lock the vehicle after the doors are closed. This way the
alarm will not arm, and your passenger will not set it off.
2-20
If the alarm is inoperative, check to see if the horn
works. If not, check the horn fuse. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 6-90. If the horn works, but
the alarm doesn’t go off, see your dealer/retailer.
Disarming the System
Always use your keyless access transmitter to unlock
a door either by pressing the unlock button on the
transmitter or by squeezing the door handle sensor while
you have the transmitter with you. Unlocking a door any
other way will set off the alarm. If your alarm sounds,
press the unlock button on the keyless access transmitter
to disarm it.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
Valet Lockout Switch
The valet lockout switch
is located inside the
glove box.
Immobilizer
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Press the switch to ON to disable the use of the trunk
and convertible top. The trunk cannot be opened except
by using the key if the valet lockout is on.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Press the switch to OFF to enable the use of the trunk
and convertible top.
Locking the glove box with your key will also help to
secure your vehicle.
2-21
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the ignition
mode transitions to OFF.
The immobilization system is disarmed when the ignition
mode transitions to ACCESSORY or START and a
valid transmitter is found in the vehicle.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
The system has one or more keyless access
transmitters that are matched to an immobilizer control
unit in your vehicle. Only a correctly matched keyless
access transmitter will start the vehicle. If the keyless
access transmitter is ever damaged, you may not
be able to start your vehicle.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does
not start and the security light comes on, there may
be a problem with your immobilizer system. Press the
START button again.
2-22
If the vehicle does not start and the keyless access
transmitter appears to be undamaged, try another
keyless access transmitter. Or, you may try placing the
transmitter in the transmitter pocket. See “NO FOBS
DETECTED” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-63 for additional information. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 6-90. If the engine
still does not start with the other transmitter, your
vehicle needs service. If the engine does start, the
first transmitter may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer
who can service the theft-deterrent system and
have a new keyless access transmitter programmed
to the vehicle.
It is possible for the immobilizer system to learn new or
replacement keyless access transmitters. Up to 4 keyless
access transmitters can be programmed for the vehicle.
To program additional transmitters, see “Matching
transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under Keyless Access
System Operation on page 2-6.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Ignition Positions
Your vehicle has an
electronic keyless ignition
with pushbutton start.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
In order to shift out of PARK (P), the vehicle must be
running or in ACCESSORY mode and the regular brake
pedal must be applied.
/ (START): Press this button while your foot is on
the brake to start the engine. The shifter must be
in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to start the engine and
the keyless access transmitter must be in the vehicle
for the ignition to work.
2-23
9Acc. (OFF/ACCESSORY):
When this button is
pressed, the engine will turn off even if the shifter is not in
PARK (P). If the shifter is in PARK (P), the ignition mode
will change to Retained Accessory Power (RAP), if all
doors are closed. The ignition mode will change to off, if a
front door is opened. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 2-24 for more information. If the shifter is
not in PARK (P), the ignition mode will change to Acc..
See Shifting Into PARK (P) on page 2-32.
When the engine is off, press this button to place the
vehicle in accessory mode. ACCESSORY MODE ON will
display on the Driver Information Center (DIC). This mode
allows you to use things like the radio and the windshield
wipers while the engine is off. Use accessory mode if you
must have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off,
for example, if your vehicle is being towed. If the door is
open while in accessory mode, the key in reminder chime
will sound continuously.
If the push-button start is not working, your vehicle
may be near a strong radio antenna signal causing
interference to the keyless access system. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-63 for more
information.
After being in ACCESSORY mode for about 20 minutes,
the vehicle will automatically enter RAP or will turn off,
depending on if the doors are opened or closed.
2-24
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Audio Steering Wheel Controls
• Power Windows
Power to these accessories continues to work for up to
10 minutes or until a door is opened. For additional
10 minutes of operation, close all the doors and press
the Acc. button to place the vehicle in accessory mode.
Press the button again to return to RAP.
Starting the Engine
To place the transmission in the proper gear:
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). To
restart when you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N).
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
The keyless access transmitter must be inside the
vehicle for the ignition to work.
Cell phone chargers can interfere with the operation of
the Keyless Access System. Battery chargers should
not be plugged in when starting or turning off the engine.
3. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently until
the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
To start you vehicle, do the following:
4. If the engine does not start and no DIC message is
displayed, wait 15 seconds before trying again to let
the cranking motor cool down.
If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
while cranking for up to 15 seconds maximum. Wait
at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts,
let go of the accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot on the brake pedal, press the
START button located on the instrument panel.
If there is not a keyless access transmitter in
the vehicle or if there is something causing
interference with it, the DIC will display NO FOBS
DETECTED. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-63 for more information.
2. When the engine begins cranking, let go of the
button and the engine cranks automatically until
it starts. If the battery in the keyless access
transmitter is weak, the DIC displays KEY FOB
BATTERY LOW. You can still drive the vehicle.
See “Battery Replacement” under Keyless Access
System Operation on page 2-6 for more information.
If the fob battery is dead, you need to insert the
fob into the fob slot to enable engine starting.
See “No Fobs Detected” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-63.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by pressing the START button immediately
after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at
least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down.
2-25
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine and
protects components. Once cranking has been initiated,
the engine continues cranking for a few seconds or until
the vehicle starts. If the engine does not start, cranking
automatically stops after 15 seconds to prevent cranking
motor damage. To prevent gear damage, this system
also prevents cranking if the engine is already running.
Automatic Transmission Operation
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check
with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
Stopping Your Engine
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) and press the Acc.
button located on the instrument panel. If the shifter is
not in PARK (P), the engine shuts off and the vehicle
goes into the Accessory Mode. The DIC displays SHIFT
TO PARK. Once the shifter is moved to PARK (P),
the vehicle turns off.
The DIC displays NO FOB, OFF OR RUN?, if the
keyless access transmitter is not detected inside the
vehicle when it is turned off.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-63 for
more information.
2-26
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It is
the best position to use when you starting the engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P). See Shifting Into PARK (P)
on page 2-32.
Be sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system.
You have to fully apply the regular brakes first and
then press the shift lever button before you can shift
from PARK (P) when the vehicle is running. If you
cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift
lever and push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)
as you maintain brake application. Then press the
shift lever button and move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting Out of PARK (P) on page 2-33.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow
on page 5-21.
2-27
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
Use Neutral (N) if the vehicle must be moved with the
engine off for short distances. Please see Towing
Your Vehicle on page 5-27.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.
If you need more power for passing and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h),
push the accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (56km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
2-28
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
Control on page 5-12.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Maximum engine speed is limited to protect driveline
components from improper operation.
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
The Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature lets you manually
control over the operation of the transmission.
To use this feature, move
the shift lever from the
DRIVE (D) position to the
left and into the driver
shift control gate.
The Head-Up Display (HUD) also displays the requested
gear, though the actual upshift or downshift could be
delayed until the engine speed is correct for that gear.
The requested gear displays on the HUD until the
next time you upshift or downshift. The gear selected
and shown in the HUD is one of a number of gears
available. The vehicle does not upshift beyond
the chosen gear. The actual gear that the vehicle shifts
to depends on a combination of the driver-requested
gear range, vehicle speed and throttle position.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle at high RPMs
without upshifting while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage your vehicle. Always
upshift when necessary while using DSC.
The Sport Automatic Mode is selected by moving the
shift lever into the DSC area without shifting towards
the + (plus) or − (minus) symbols. While in the
Sport Automatic Mode, the transmission computer
determines when the vehicle is being driven in a
competitive manner. It then selects and holds the
transmission in lower gears giving more noticeable
upshifts for a sportier vehicle performance. Once you
shift to the + (plus) or − (minus) controls, the driver
manual gear selection is activated. A + (plus) symbol
appears on the shift console above the DRIVE (D)
indicator and minus symbol appears below the indicator.
If you do not upshift as the engine approaches the red
line on the engine RPM (Revolutions Per Minute) gage,
the engine speed is controlled to limit the engine RPM.
Not all manual downshift requests will be allowed by
the transmission. To prevent excessive engine RPMs,
each gear has a maximum vehicle speed associated
with it. Any downshift request above this speed is
not allowed by the transmission.
If shifting is prevented for any reason, the current
gear flashes multiple times in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), indicating that the transmission has
not shifted gears.
2-29
Some automatic downshifts can occur to maintain
minimum engine speed. This only happens if the vehicle
is left in too high of a gear for the vehicle’s speed.
For example, if you have been driving in sixth gear
range and come to a stop without manually
downshifting, the transmission automatically downshifts
to first gear and displays first gear on the HUD. As
you begin to drive and accelerate, the transmission
remains in first gear until the driver selects an upshift.
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal is
located to the left of the
regular brake pedal,
near the driver’s door.
DSC can be used while using cruise control, but
transmission shifting is different while the cruise control
is on. This is not a malfunction and is necessary to
let proper operation of the cruise control.
To return to fully automatic operation, move the shift
lever to the right and back into DRIVE (D).
When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowy
and icy conditions, you may want to shift into second
gear. A higher gear lets you gain more traction on
slippery surfaces.
In higher gears, on the XLR only, an automatic downshift
occurs if you press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
This feature provides adequate acceleration capabilities
if you forget to downshift manually. Tap the shifter
forward and the vehicle upshifts.
2-30
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot and push the parking brake
pedal down with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the parking brake indicator light
on the instrument panel cluster should come on.
If it does not, you need to have your vehicle serviced.
When you move out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
and the engine is running, the parking brake should
release. If the parking brake has not been fully released
and you try to drive off with the parking brake on, the
parking brake indicator light will come on and stay on.
If the parking brake does not fully release, you can
manually release the pedal.
{CAUTION:
Always shift to PARK (P) before pulling the
manual release lever. If your hand or arm is in
the way of the pedal you could be hurt. The
pedal springs back quickly. Keep your hand
and arm away when you use the manual
release lever.
Before releasing the manual parking brake, be sure to
put the vehicle in PARK (P) and turn the ignition off.
Reach under the driver’s side of the instrument panel and
pull down on the manual release lever, which is located
behind the parking brake pedal. Pull down on the yellow
tab. If the parking brake does not release, you should
have your vehicle towed to your dealer for service.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before driving.
2-31
Shifting Into PARK (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot
and set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 2-30 for more
information.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition off.
2-32
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold down
the regular brake pedal. See if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” listed previously in this section.
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
• Prevent shifting out of PARK (P) unless the
vehicle is running or in Accessory mode and
the regular brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on page 6-41
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the
shift lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
2-33
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-34
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-34.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set the
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into PARK (P) on page 2-32.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 5-17.
2-35
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
Outside Power Heated Mirrors
The controls for the
outside power mirrors are
located is on the driver’s
door armrest.
Your vehicle has an automatic dimming inside rearview
mirror. The mirror also contains OnStar® controls.
For more information about OnStar®, see OnStar®
System on page 2-41.
O (On/Off):
This button, located on the lower left side
of the mirror, is for the automatic dimming functions.
Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming feature is active each time the
vehicle is started.
To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off, press
and release the on/off button. The indicator light will
illuminate when this feature is active.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
2-36
Move the selector switch, located below the four-way
control pad, to the left or the right to choose the driver’s
side or passenger’s side mirror. Use the arrows
located on the four-way control pad to adjust the position
of the mirror. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little
of the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen
while sitting in a comfortable driving position. Keep the
selector switch in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
Both mirrors have a heated feature to rid them of snow,
ice, or condensation. They will heat when the rear
window defogger is turned on. See “Rear Window
Defogger” under Dual Climate Control System on
page 3-38. If the vehicle has the memory option, the
preferred mirror position can be stored. See Memory
Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 1-3.
Both mirrors can be manually folded inward by pulling
them toward the vehicle. This feature may be useful
when going through a car wash or a confined space.
Push the mirrors away from the vehicle, to the normal
position, before driving.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
The driver’s side mirror will adjust for the glare of
headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by the
on and off settings on the inside automatic dimming
rearview mirror. See Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror with OnStar® on page 2-36.
Park Assist Mirror
The passenger’s side mirror is also capable of
performing the curb view assist feature. This feature will
cause the mirror to tilt to a factory programmed
position when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). This
feature may be useful in allowing you to view the curb
when you are parallel parking.
If further adjustment is needed after the mirror is tilted,
the mirror switch may be used. The mirror will then
return to this new position when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and
a five-second delay has occurred, the passenger’s side
mirror will return to its original position.
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Park Assist” under
DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-76 for more
information.
2-37
Outside Convex Mirror
Object Detection Systems
{CAUTION:
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA)
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, it helps you park easier and avoid other
vehicles while in REVERSE (R). It operates at speeds
less than 3 mph (5 km/h). It can determine how close
objects are to the rear bumper, up to 5 feet (1.5 m)
behind your vehicle. The distance sensors are located
on the rear bumper.
The passenger side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s
surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver’s seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles,
look farther away than they really are.
2-38
{CAUTION:
The display is located
between the driver and
passenger seatbacks.
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision.
It cannot detect:
• objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are
too close or far from the vehicle
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
If you do not use proper care before and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death
could occur. Even with URPA, always check
behind your vehicle before backing up.
While backing, be sure to look for objects
and check your vehicle’s mirrors.
URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance
and system information.
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into REVERSE (R). The rear display will then
briefly illuminate to let you know the system is working.
URPA operates only at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
If you are above this speed, the red light on the rear
display will flash.
2-39
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below trunk level.
Objects must also be within 5 feet (1.5 m) from your
rear bumper. This distance may be less during warmer
or humid weather.
A single beep will sound the first time an object is
detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m)
away. Repeated beeping will occur when you are
closer than 20 inches (0.5 m) from the object.
The following describes what will occur with the URPA
display as you get closer to a detected object:
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
amber/amber/red
lights/continuous beep
amber/amber/red
lights flashing and
continuous beep
2-40
English
5 ft
40 in
Metric
1.5 m
1.0 m
20 in
0.5 m
1 ft
0.3 m
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean, a red URPA
display light may illuminate when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). Keep your rear bumper free of mud,
dirt, snow, ice and slush. For cleaning instructions,
see Washing Your Vehicle on page 6-83.
• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle
or an object was hanging out of your trunk during
your last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate.
Once the attached object is removed, URPA
will return to normal operation.
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at
least 15 mph (25 km/h), take your vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
OnStar® System
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be sent to your location.
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock
your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press
the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside
Service for you.
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your
OnStar service at any time by contacting OnStar.
A complete OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar
Terms and Conditions are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar Subscriber glove box literature. For more
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or
TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button
to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description
of OnStar services and system limitations, see the
OnStar Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit
onstar.com.
2-41
OnStar Services
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,
or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for
one year from the date of purchase. You can extend
this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the
Directions & Connections Plan. For more information,
press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.
Some OnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock
or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be
available until you register with OnStar.
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
2-42
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into the
vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid Minute
Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to a
Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on eligibility.
To find out more, refer to the OnStar Owner’s Guide in
the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar advisor by
pressing the OnStar button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
OnStar Virtual Advisor
How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and
stock quotes. By pressing the phone button and giving
a few simple voice commands, you can browse
through the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s
Guide for more information (Only available in the
continental U.S.).
In order to provide you with OnStar services, your
vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability of recording
and transmitting vehicle information. This information
is automatically sent to an OnStar Call Center at
the time of an OnStar button press, Emergency button
press or if your airbags or AACN system deploys.
The vehicle information usually includes your GPS
location and, in the event of a crash, additional
information regarding the accident that your vehicle has
been involved in (e.g. the direction from which your
vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual Advisor
feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle
also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we can
provide you with location-based services.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-82 for
more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button for
a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR” in
order to activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling feature.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for
more information.
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar
service also cannot work unless you are in a place
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for
that area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services
are available everywhere, particularly in remote
or enclosed areas, or at all times.
2-43
OnStar service that involves location information about
your vehicle cannot work unless GPS satellite signals
are unobstructed and available in that place as well.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of your
vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
You may need to increase the volume of your radio
to hear the OnStar advisor. If the light next to the
OnStar buttons is red, this means that your system is
not functioning properly and should be checked by your
dealer/retailer. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired.
You can always press the OnStar button to confirm
that your OnStar equipment is active.
2-44
Universal Home Remote
System
Universal Home Remote System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization Certificate
number is KOBGTV06A.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
The Canadian Registration ID number is 3521A-GTV06A.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person available to
assist you in programming the transmitter.
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting
Diode (LED) indicator lights above the Universal
Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future
programming. You only need the original remote control
transmitter for Fixed Code programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale or lease termination
of the vehicle, the programmed buttons should be
erased for security purposes. See “Erasing Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
This system provides a way to replace up to
three remote control transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door openers, security
systems, and home automation devices.
When programming a garage door, it is advised to
park outside of the garage. Be sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage door or security
device you are programming.
2-45
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
To program up to three devices:
If you have questions or need help programming
the Universal Home Remote System, call
1-866-572-2728 or go to www.learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are
Rolling Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions,
the device will time out and you will have to repeat
the procedure.
2-46
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that you would
like to use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light, above the
selected button, should slowly blink. You may
need to hold the button from five to 20 seconds.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this
button. After you press this button, you will have
30 seconds to complete the following steps.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-5, choosing
a different function button in Step 3 than what you
used for the garage door opener.
If these instructions do not work, you probably
have a Fixed Code garage door opener. Follow
the Programming instructions that follow for a
Fixed Code garage door opener.
2-47
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
To program up to three devices:
If you have questions or need help programming
the Universal Home Remote System, call
1-866-572-2728 or go to www.learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are
Fixed Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions,
the device will time out and you will have to repeat
the procedure.
1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage door
opener, remove the battery cover on your hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer
of your garage door opener motor. If you see a
row of dip switches similar to the graphic above,
you have a Fixed Code garage door opener. If you
do not see a row of dip switches, return to the
previous section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
Your hand held transmitter may have between
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of
transmitter.
2-48
Your garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
may also have a row of dip switches that can be
used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the
motor head and hand held transmitter are different,
or if the dip switch settings are different, use the
dip switch settings on the motor head unit to
program your Universal Home Remote. The motor
head dip switch settings can also be used when
you do not have the original hand held transmitter.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
Your panel of switches may not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should
be similar.
The switch positions on your hand-held transmitter
may be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position may be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position may be labeled as
“Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position may be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
2-49
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from
left to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position,
write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position,
write “Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings that you wrote down in
Step 2 will now become the button strokes
you enter into the Universal Home Remote in
Step 4. Be sure to enter the switch settings
that you wrote down in Step 2, in order from
left to right, into the Universal Home Remote,
when completing Step 4.
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all
three buttons at the same time for about
three seconds. Release the buttons to put the
Universal Home Remote into programming mode.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now press
one button on the Universal Home Remote for each
switch setting as follows:
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in
the vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in
the vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button
in the vehicle.
2-50
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button you would like to use
to control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected button
should slowly blink. You may need to hold the
button from five to 55 seconds.
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
8. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8,
choosing a different button in Step 6 than what you
used for the garage door opener.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of
a second. The indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
You can reprogram any of the three buttons by repeating
the instructions.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
You should erase the programmed buttons when you
sell or terminate your lease.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located directly above the
buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 8-5.
2-51
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open, lift the handle up. Use the key to lock
and unlock.
Cupholder(s)
The cupholders are located under a lid in the front
console to the right of the shift lever. Press the
left side of the lid and it will open automatically.
Center Console Storage
There is a center console storage area located between
the seats. To open this storage area, push the latch
button and lift the lid.
There is also an upright center console storage area
between the seatbacks. To open the storage area, press
and release the button near the top so it extends out.
Then, turn the button in either direction to unlatch the lid
and pull the console lid down. After you close the lid,
press the release button back in.
2-52
Floor Mats
The driver’s side floor mat is held in place by two snaps
and the passenger’s side is held in place by one.
To remove the floor mats, pull up on the rear of the
mat to disconnect from the snaps. To reinstall the floor
mats, line up the openings in the floor mat over the
snaps and push down into place.
Be sure that the driver’s side floor mat is properly
placed on the floor so that it does not block the
movement of the accelerator pedal.
Rear Storage Area
To install the cargo divider, snap the bottom of the divider
onto the snaps (B) located on the floor of the trunk. Then,
pull the divider up and place the pins on each side of the
divider into the notches (A) on either side of the trunk.
There is also a storage compartment located in the trunk
on the passenger’s side.
To access the storage compartment, unsnap the lid.
To reinstall the lid, line up the opening in the lid over the
snap and push down into place.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear of
the vehicle. Put small loads behind the net. The net is not
for heavier loads. Store them as far forward as you can.
There is a cargo divider located in the trunk to keep
cargo from getting in the way of the retractable hardtop.
The cargo divider must be in place for the top to move.
2-53
Retractable Hardtop
Lowering the Retractable Hardtop
The following procedures explain the proper operation
of the retractable hardtop. The retractable hardtop
will not operate if the valet lockout switch is on.
Notice: Leaving the retractable hardtop down and
exposing the interior of your vehicle to outdoor
conditions may cause damage. Always close
the retractable hardtop if leaving your vehicle
outdoors.
If the retractable hardtop is lowered or raised multiple
times, the engine should be running while doing so
to prevent drain on the vehicle’s battery.
{CAUTION:
When the retractable hardtop is opened or
closed, people can be injured by the parts that
move: the hardtop and its mechanism, the
trunk lid, and the side windows. Keep people
away from these parts when you are lowering
or raising the top.
1. Park on a level surface and shift the transmission
into PARK (P).
2. The vehicle’s engine must be on or in Acc.
3. Lower both sun visors.
Notice: Raising or lowering the top while the
vehicle is in motion can cause damage to the top
or top mechanism. Make sure the vehicle is in
PARK (P) to lower or raise the top.
Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, or dirty
can cause stains, mildew, and damage to the
inside of your vehicle. Dry off the top before
lowering it.
4. Make sure that nothing or no one is on or around
the top. Make sure the trunk cargo cover is in
place with nothing on top or in front of the cargo
cover. See Rear Storage Area on page 2-53
for more information. Also, make sure the valet
lockout switch is off.
2-54
5. Push and hold
the bottom of the
retractable hardtop
button located on
the console behind
the shifter lever.
The windows will automatically lower and the top will
automatically lower into the storage area. A chime
will sound when the top has lowered completely.
If the radio is on, the sound may be muted briefly while
the retractable top is lowered. This occurs because
a new audio system equalization is being loaded.
Under certain conditions, the Driver Information Center
(DIC) may display messages regarding the retractable
hardtop. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-63 for more information.
If the retractable hardtop does not operate, and there
are no messages displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), then perform the “Power Window Initialize”
steps under Power Windows on page 2-17.
Raising the Retractable Hardtop
1. Park on a level surface. Shift the transmission
into PARK (P).
2. The vehicle’s engine must be on or in Acc.
3. Lower both sun visors.
Notice: Raising or lowering the top while the vehicle
is in motion can cause damage to the top or top
mechanism. Make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P)
to lower or raise the top.
4. Make sure nothing or no one is on or around the
top. Make sure the trunk cargo cover is in place
with no cargo on top of or in front of the cargo
cover. See Rear Storage Area on page 2-53 for
more information. Also, be sure the valet lockout
switch is off.
5. Push and hold the
top of the retractable
hardtop button located
behind the shift lever.
The windows will
automatically lower
and the top will raise.
A chime will sound
when the top has
raised completely.
2-55
After the top is fully raised, release the retractable
hardtop button. If you press the button again within
five seconds, the windows will automatically close.
If your radio is on, you may notice a brief mute in
sound. This is normal and due to a new audio system
equalization being loaded for the vehicle with the
top raised.
Under certain conditions, the Driver Information
Center (DIC) may display messages regarding the
retractable hardtop. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-63 for more information.
If the retractable hardtop does not operate, and there
are no messages displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), then perform the “Power Window Initialize”
steps under Power Windows on page 2-17.
Manually Raising the Retractable Hardtop
If your vehicle has a power loss, such as a dead battery,
you can still raise the top manually by doing the following:
1. Lower both sun visors and open both doors.
2. Use the key to open the trunk. See Keys on
page 2-3 and Trunk on page 2-13 for more
information.
3. Raise the trunk by hand.
4. Find the hydraulic
pump under the
carpet on the rear
driver’s side of
the trunk. Open the
valve by turning
it counterclockwise
with your hand
until it stops.
Notice: Pressing the retractable hardtop button
when the hydraulic pump valve is open could
damage the pump. Always close the hydraulic pump
valve after the retractable hardtop has been closed
manually.
2-56
5. Pull both sides of the rear tonneau over-center link
down to unlock the linkage.
6. Move the rear tonneau rearward and up to the
stored position. Pull from the center of the
tonneau to keep pressure even. The rubber bumper
on each corner will fit against the underside of
the trunk decklid.
2-57
7. Push both sides of the rear tonneau over-center
link up until they stop to lock the linkage.
8. Close the hydraulic pump valve by turning it
clockwise with your hand until it stops.
2-58
9. Remove the upright center storage compartment.
Use the wrench to remove the four screws holding
the storage area in place.
10. Reach behind the square hole and push the front
tonneau over-center link up. The front tonneau
should pull up easily. If it does not, push the
over-center link up more.
11. Manually move the front tonneau to the open
position. Once the front tonneau is open, fold
the side wings by gently pressing them in.
Do not force the wings. If they are hard to move,
make sure the front tonneau is open all the way.
2-59
12. Reach in from the side of the vehicle and under the
top to remove the headliner plug. The plug will be
located in the center of the top near the front.
13. Insert the wrench into the bolt beneath the plug
location. Turn the wrench about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise until it stops while gently pulling
up on the center of the top to release it.
2-60
14. Hold the top in the front and side and lift the top out
of the stored position.
15. Hold the top in the front and the rear and lift the
top until it is almost closed. Be careful not to
pinch your fingers between the rear of the top
and the rear window.
16. Place your hands on the top and guide the top
into the closed position.
2-61
19. Pull down on the roof with the latch turned open.
Turn the wrench clockwise until it stops to lock the
top into position. Push up on the roof. If it moves
away from the windshield header it is not latched
and you will need to repeat the previous steps.
17. While sitting in the driver’s seat, pull down on the
rear of the top.
18. While holding the rear
of the top down, insert
the wrench into the
bolt in the plug opening
in the headliner.
Turn the wrench
counterclockwise until
it stops to fully
open the latch jaws
around the pins.
2-62
20. From outside the vehicle, push down on both rear
corners of the top to make sure it is completely
locked into place.
21. From inside the vehicle, reach behind the headrest
and gently pull the wings out a small amount.
Then, fold the front tonneau to the closed position.
22. Manually close the trunk.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column .........................................3-7
Heated Steering Wheel ...................................3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-8
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-9
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9
Windshield Wipers ........................................3-10
Rainsense™ Wipers ......................................3-11
Windshield Washer .......................................3-12
Headlamp Washer ........................................3-12
Cruise Control ..............................................3-12
Adaptive Cruise Control .................................3-15
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-28
Wiper Activated Headlamps ............................3-29
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-29
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-29
Adaptive Forward Lighting System ...................3-30
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-30
Twilight Sentinel® ..........................................3-31
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ........................3-32
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-32
Courtesy Lamps ...........................................3-32
Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................3-32
Reading Lamps ............................................3-32
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-33
Head-Up Display (HUD) .................................3-33
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-36
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-37
Climate Controls ............................................3-38
Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-38
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-42
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-42
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-43
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-44
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-45
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-45
Tachometer .................................................3-45
Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-46
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-46
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-47
Charging System Light ..................................3-49
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-50
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-50
Antilock Brake System
Warning Light ...........................................3-51
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light ...........................................3-52
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-53
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-53
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-54
Engine Oil Pressure Gage .............................3-57
Security Light ...............................................3-58
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-58
Lights On Reminder ......................................3-58
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-58
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-59
3-2
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-60
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-60
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-63
Other Messages ...........................................3-74
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-76
Trip Computer ................................................3-80
Oil Life Indicator ...........................................3-80
Audio System(s) .............................................3-81
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-82
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-82
Radio Reception ...........................................3-84
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-85
Care of the CD Player ...................................3-85
Diversity Antenna System ..............................3-85
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-85
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
XLR shown, XLR-V similar
3-4
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Head-Up Display (HUD) Controls/Instrument Panel
Brightness Controls. See Head-Up Display (HUD)
on page 3-33 or Instrument Panel Brightness
on page 3-32.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8.Cruise
Control. See Cruise Control on page 3-12. Exterior
Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on page 3-28.
Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-30.
C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-44.
D. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See “Windshield
Wipers” under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
on page 3-8.
E. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls/Interior
Lamps. See DIC Operation and Displays on
page 3-60.
F. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-42.
G. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
H. Voice Commands/Audio Controls. See OnStar®
System on page 2-41 or Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 3-82.
I. Adaptive Cruise Controls (If Equipped).
See “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” under
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8.
J. Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Button.
See Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering
Column on page 3-7.
K. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
L. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering
Wheel Controls on page 3-82.
M. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-23.
N. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 2-26.
O. Traction Control Button. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 5-6.
P. Retractable Hardtop Button. See Retractable
Hardtop on page 2-54.
Q. Cupholders. See Cupholder(s) on page 2-52.
R. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette
Lighter on page 3-37.
S. Climate Controls. See Dual Climate Control System
on page 3-38.
T. Audio/Navigation System. See Navigation System
Overview on page 4-2.
U. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-52.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
near the center of the
instrument panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
mode the ignition is in, even if the ignition is turned off.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button again
to turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
3-6
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column
The power tilt and
telescope wheel control is
located on the outboard
side of the steering
column.
Heated Steering Wheel
Your vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.
The button with this
symbol is located on the
left side of the steering
wheel.
Press the button to turn the heated steering wheel on or
off. A light on the button will display when the feature
is turned on.
To operate the power tilt feature, push the control up
and the steering wheel tilts up. Push the control
down and the steering wheel goes down.
The steering wheel will take about three minutes to
start heating.
Push the control forward and the steering wheel moves
toward the front of the vehicle. Push the control
rearward and the steering wheel moves toward the rear
of the vehicle. To set the memory position, see DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-76 and Memory Seat,
Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 1-3.
3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the multifunction lever all the
way up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• GTurn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn
and Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8.
• 3Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9.
• -Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-30.
• Flash-to-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass on
page 3-9.
• ICruise Control. See Cruise Control on
•
3-8
page 3-12.
P Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps
on page 3-28.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
If you signal a turn or a lane change and the arrows
flash faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned
out. Other drivers will not see the turn signal.
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
accidents. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuses and check for burned-out
bulbs. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 6-90.
Turn Signal on Chime
Flash-to-Pass
A chime will remind you if you leave the turn signal on
for more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km) of driving.
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps
to signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.
Pull and hold the turn signal lever toward you to use.
When you do, the following will occur:
If you need to leave the turn signal on for more than
3/4 mile (1.2 km), turn off the signal and then turn
it back on.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high,
push the turn signal lever all the way forward.
When the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
will also be on.
• If the low-beam headlamps are on, the high-beam
headlamps will turn on. They will stay on as long
as you hold the lever there. Release the lever
to turn them off.
• If the headlamps are on high-beam, they will switch
to low-beam. To return to high beam, push the
lever away from you.
To change the headlamps from high to low, pull the
lever rearward.
3-9
Windshield Wipers
x (Delay Adjustment):
Move the lever to this
position to choose a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the
intermittent adjust band down for a longer delay or up
for a shorter delay. The wiper speed can only be
manually adjusted when the lever is in this position.
9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off the
windshield wipers.
8 (Mist):
Use the lever located on the right side of the steering
column to operate the windshield wipers.
1 (High Speed): Move the lever to this position for
steady wiping at high speed.
6 (Low Speed):
Move the lever to this position
for steady wiping at low speed.
& (Delay):
Move the lever to this position to set a
delay between wipes.
3-10
Move the lever all the way down to mist
and release for a single wiping cycle. The windshield
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes,
hold the band on mist longer.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. If this
occurs, a circuit breaker will stop the wipers until the
motor cools. So, be sure to clear any ice and snow
from the windshield wiper blades before using them.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen them or warm the windshield before turning
the wipers on. If your blades do become worn or
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Rainsense™ Wipers
Your vehicle has Rainsense™ wipers. The moisture
sensor for this feature is mounted on the interior side of
the windshield below the rearview mirror and is used to
automatically operate the wipers by monitoring the
amount of moisture build-up on the windshield. Wipes
occur as needed to clear the windshield depending on
driving conditions and the sensitivity setting. In light rain
or snow, fewer wipes will occur. In heavy rain or snow,
wipes will occur more frequently. The Rainsense™
wipers operate in a delay mode as well as a continuous
low or high speed as needed. If the system is left on for
long periods of time, occasional wipes may occur without
any moisture on the windshield. This is normal and
indicates that the Rainsense™ system is activated.
The Rainsense™ system is also sensitive to vibration.
The system may activate if something hits the windshield
or if the vehicle hits a bump.
The Rainsense™ system can be activated by moving
the wiper lever up to the delay position and turning the
delay adjust band to one of the five sensitivity levels.
The bottom delay adjust position is the lowest sensitivity
setting, level one. This allows more rain or snow to collect
on the windshield between wipes. Turning the delay
adjust band away from you to the higher sensitivity levels
allows less rain or snow to collect on the windshield
between wipes.
The top position is the highest sensitivity setting, level
five. A single wipe will occur each time you turn the
delay adjust band to a higher sensitivity level to indicate
that the sensitivity level has been increased.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and are not
affected by the Rainsense™ function. The Rainsense™
system can be overridden at any time by manually
changing the wiper control to low or high speed.
When Rainsense™ is active, the headlamps will turn on
automatically. If it is dark, they will remain on. See
“Wiper-Activated Headlamps” under Exterior Lamps on
page 3-28 for more information.
Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on the
exterior glass surface directly in front of the moisture
sensor. Doing this could cause the moisture sensor
to malfunction.
3-11
Windshield Washer
Headlamp Washer
K (Washer Fluid):
The headlamps washer only functions every fourth time
the washer button is depressed and if the headlamps
are on.
The lever on the right side of the
steering column also controls the windshield washer.
There is a button at the end of the lever. To spray
washer fluid on the windshield, press the button and
hold it. The washer will spray until you release the
button. The wipers will continue to clear the window for
about six seconds after the button is released and
then stop or return to your preset speed.
Cruise Control
Your vehicle has cruise control.
9 (Off): This position
turns the system off.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir is
low, the message LOW WASHER FLUID will appear
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display.
It will take 60 seconds after the bottle is refilled for this
message to turn off. For information on the correct
washer fluid mixture to use, see Windshield Washer
Fluid on page 6-36 and Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7-11.
3-12
R (On):
This position turns the system on.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): This position makes the
vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.
T (Set):
Press this button at the end of the lever
to set the speed.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle has the traction control system and it
begins to limit wheel spin while cruise control is on,
the cruise control will automatically disengage.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-6.
When road conditions allow you to safely use it
again, you may turn cruise control back on.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
3. Press the set button at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The cruise symbol on the
instrument panel cluster
will be lit when the
cruise control is engaged.
3-13
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This disengages the
cruise control. But it does not need to be reset.
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch briefly from
on to resume/accelerate.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply
the brake. Do not hold the switch at resume/accelerate,
unless you want the vehicle to go faster.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Press the set button at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal. You will
now cruise at the higher speed. If the accelerator
pedal is held longer than 60 seconds, cruise control
will turn off.
3-14
• Move the cruise switch from on to resume/
accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to the
desired speed, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
• Press and hold the set button until you reach the
lower speed desired, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, your vehicle
will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Adaptive Cruise Control
How well your cruise control works on hills depends upon
your speed, load and the steepness of the hills. When
going up steep hills, you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your vehicle’s speed down. Of course, applying
the brake turns off the cruise control. Many drivers find
this to be too much trouble and do not use cruise control
on steep hills.
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this
entire section before using it.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal
• Move the cruise control switch to off
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Erasing Speed Memory
1. This device may not cause interference.
Turning off the cruise control or the ignition, will erase
your cruise control set speed memory.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
3-15
Adaptive Cruise Control is an enhancement to
traditional cruise control and is not a safety system.
It allows you to keep cruise control engaged in moderate
traffic conditions without it having to be constantly
reset. Adaptive Cruise Control uses radar to detect a
vehicle directly ahead in your path, within a distance
of 328 ft (100 m), and operates at speeds above
25 mph (40 km/h). When it is engaged by the driver,
the system can apply limited braking or acceleration
of the vehicle, automatically, to maintain a selected
following distance to the vehicle ahead. The vehicle’s
braking during Adaptive Cruise Control is comparable
to a person applying moderate pressure to the vehicle’s
brake pedal. To disengage Adaptive Cruise Control,
apply the brake. If no vehicle is in your path, your
vehicle will react like traditional cruise control.
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply hard
braking or bring the vehicle to a complete
stop. It will not respond to stopped vehicles,
pedestrians or animals. When you are
approaching a vehicle or object, Adaptive
Cruise Control may not have time to slow your
vehicle enough to avoid a collision. Your
complete attention is always required while
driving and you should be ready to take action
and apply the brakes. For more information,
see Defensive Driving on page 5-2.
{CAUTION:
• On winding roads, Adaptive Cruise Control
may not detect a vehicle ahead. You could
crash into a vehicle ahead of you. Do not
use Adaptive Cruise Control on winding
roads.
CAUTION:
3-16
(Continued)
CAUTION:
The cruise controls are
located on the end of
the multifunction lever.
(Continued)
• Adaptive Cruise Control may not have
•
•
time to slow your vehicle enough to avoid
a crash when you are driving in conditions
where vehicles may suddenly slow or stop
ahead of you, enter your lane, or cross
your vehicle’s path. If you are driving in
these conditions, do not use Adaptive
Cruise Control. The warning beep and
alert symbol may indicate that you are
driving in conditions where Adaptive
Cruise Control should not be used.
See “Alerting the Driver” in this section.
On slippery roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control.
Do not use cruise control on slippery
roads.
When weather limits visibility, such as
when in fog, rain, or snow conditions,
Adaptive Cruise Control performance
is limited. There may not be enough
distance to adapt to the changing traffic
conditions. Do not use cruise control
when visibility is low.
The Adaptive Cruise controls are located on the
outboard side of the steering wheel.
9 (Off):
R (On):
This position turns the system off.
This position turns the system on.
S (Resume/Increase): Push the switch to this symbol
to make the vehicle resume the speed set previously
or to increase the set speed when Adaptive Cruise
Control is already active.
T (Set/Decrease):
Press this button to set the speed
or to decrease the set speed when Adaptive Cruise
Control is already active.
[ (Cancel):
Press this button located on the steering
wheel to cancel Adaptive cruise control.
3-17
Engaging Adaptive Cruise Control
With the Set Button
The set speed is selected by the driver. This is the speed
you will travel if there is no vehicle detected in your path.
To set Adaptive Cruise Control, do the following:
{CAUTION:
If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Control
switch on when you are not using cruise, you
might hit a button and go into cruise when you
do not want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the Adaptive Cruise Control
switch off until you want to use cruise control.
1. Make sure the Head-Up Display (HUD) is on and
properly adjusted. You cannot engage Adaptive
Cruise Control unless the HUD is on. See Head-Up
Display (HUD) on page 3-33 for more information.
2. Move the switch to the on position.
3. Get up to the desired speed.
4. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release the button.
5. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
{CAUTION:
If you operate Adaptive Cruise Control without
your Head-up Display (HUD) properly adjusted,
your Adaptive Cruise Control settings may not
be visible. You could forget your settings and
be startled by Adaptive Cruise Control
response and even lose control. Keep your
HUD on and properly adjusted when using
Adaptive Cruise Control.
3-18
Once Adaptive Cruise Control is set, it might immediately
apply the brakes if it detects a vehicle ahead that is too
close or moving slower than your vehicle.
This symbol appears
on the Head-Up
Display (HUD) to indicate
that Adaptive Cruise
Control is active.
See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-33 for more
information.
Make sure the set speed is visible on the HUD so you
know the speed your vehicle will accelerate to if a vehicle
is not detected in your path. Keep in mind speed limits,
surrounding traffic speeds, and weather conditions when
adjusting your set speed.
If your vehicle is in Adaptive Cruise Control when the
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the
Adaptive Cruise Control automatically disengages.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-6 and
StabiliTrak® System on page 5-8. When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, the Adaptive Cruise
Control can be turned back on.
Increasing Set Speed While Using
Adaptive Cruise Control
There are two ways to increase the set speed:
• Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed. Press
the set button at the end of the lever, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle
will now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch from on to
Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until the system
determines there is no vehicle in front of you. At that
point, your vehicle speed will increase to the set speed.
Decreasing Set Speed While Using
Adaptive Cruise Control
Press in the set/decrease button on the end of the lever
until you reach the lower desired speed, then release
the button.
To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press the
set/decrease button. Each this is done, your set
speed will be 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Resuming a Set Speed
If you apply the brakes while the Adaptive Cruise Control
is at a set speed, this disengages the Adaptive Cruise
Control. But it does not need to be reset.
Once the vehicle reaches about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch briefly
from on to resume/increase. Adaptive Cruise Control will
be engaged with the speed selected previously.
resume/increase. Hold it there until the desired set
speed is displayed in the HUD, then release the
switch. To increase your set speed in very small
amounts, move the switch briefly to resume/increase.
Each time this is done, your vehicle set speed
increases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
3-19
Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)
When the system detects a slower moving vehicle, it will
adjust your vehicle’s speed and maintain the following
distance (gap) selected.
Use the GAP button on
the steering wheel to
adjust the follow distance
between your vehicle
and other vehicle’s.
Press the top of the button to increase the distance or
the bottom of the button to decrease the distance.
The first button press shows the current follow distance
setting on the HUD. The current following distance
setting is maintained until it is changed.
There are six follow distances to choose from. The follow
distance selection ranges from near to far (1 second to
2 seconds follow time). The distance maintained for a
selected follow distance varies based on vehicle speed.
3-20
The faster the vehicle speed the further back you will
follow. Consider traffic and weather conditions when
selecting the follow distance. The range of selectable
distances may not be appropriate for all drivers and
driving conditions. If you prefer to travel at a following
distance farther than Adaptive Cruise Control allows,
disengage the system and drive manually.
A graphic on the HUD indicates the selected following
distance. This picture shows a maximum follow distance.
The vehicles will move closer together as you select a
smaller following distance.
Alerting the Driver
The alert symbol flashes
on the HUD and a warning
beep sounds when
driver action is required.
Driver action is required when:
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control has only limited
braking ability to slow your vehicle. In some
cases, Adaptive Cruise Control may not have
time to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a
collision. Be ready to take action and apply the
brakes yourself. See Defensive Driving on
page 5-2.
• Adaptive Cruise Control cannot apply sufficient
braking because you are approaching a vehicle
too rapidly.
• The vehicle speed drops below about
20 mph (32 km/h).
• A temporary condition prohibits Adaptive Cruise
Control from operating. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-63 for more information.
• A malfunction is detected in the system.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-63
for more information.
See Defensive Driving on page 5-2.
3-21
Approaching and Following a Vehicle
The vehicle ahead symbol
only appears on the HUD
when a vehicle ahead
is detected in your path.
If this symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,
Adaptive Cruise Control will not respond to vehicles
you may see ahead.
{CAUTION:
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect
a vehicle ahead. Adaptive Cruise Control may
not have time to slow your vehicle enough to
avoid a collision. Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control when the radar is blocked by snow,
ice, or dirt. Keep your radar clean. See
“Cleaning the System” later in this section.
Adaptive Cruise Control automatically slows your
vehicle down when approaching a slower moving vehicle.
It then adjusts your speed to follow the vehicle in front at
the selected following distance. Your speed increases
or decreases to follow the vehicle in front of you, but will
not exceed the set speed. It may apply limited braking,
if necessary. When braking is active, your brake lights
come on. It may feel or sound different than if you were
applying the brakes yourself. This is normal.
3-22
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and
react to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or
other objects ahead of you. You could crash
into an object ahead of you. Do not use
Adaptive Cruise Control when approaching
stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other
objects.
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and
react to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or
other objects ahead of you. Your vehicle may
accelerate toward objects, such as a stopped
vehicle that suddenly appears after the lead
vehicle changes lanes. Your complete attention
is always required while driving and you should
be ready to take action and apply the brakes.
Low-Speed Deactivation
If your speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h) while
following a vehicle ahead, Adaptive Cruise Control
begins to disengage. The driver alert symbol on
the HUD flashes and the warning beep sounds.
The driver must take action since Adaptive Cruise
Control will not slow the vehicle to a stop.
Passing a Vehicle
To increase speed to pass a vehicle, use the accelerator
pedal. While your foot is on the accelerator pedal,
the system will not automatically apply the brakes.
Once you pass the vehicle and remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal, Adaptive Cruise Control returns
to normal operation and the brakes can be applied,
if needed.
{CAUTION:
If you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal,
the system will not automatically apply the
brakes. You could crash into a vehicle ahead
of you. Do not rest your foot on the accelerator
pedal when using Adaptive Cruise Control.
3-23
Curves in the Road
{CAUTION:
Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitations in
curves, it may respond to a vehicle in another
lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle
in your lane. You could crash into a vehicle
ahead of you, or lose control of your vehicle.
Give extra attention in curves and be ready to
use the brakes if necessary. Select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
Adaptive Cruise Control might operate differently in a
sharp curve. It might reduce your speed if the curve is
too sharp. The TIGHT CURVE message will also display
on the HUD. See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-33
for more information.
3-24
When following a vehicle and entering a curve, Adaptive
Cruise Control could lose track of the vehicle in your
lane and accelerate your vehicle. When this happens,
the vehicle ahead symbol will not appear on the HUD.
Highway Exit Ramps
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of the
vehicle ahead and accelerate up to your set
speed while entering or on highway exit ramps.
You could be startled by this acceleration and
even lose control of the vehicle. Disengage
Adaptive Cruise Control before entering a
highway exit ramp. Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control while entering or on exit ramps.
Adaptive Cruise Control might detect a vehicle that is
not in your lane and apply the brakes.
Adaptive Cruise Control might occasionally provide a
driver alert and/or braking that you consider unnecessary.
It could respond to signs, guardrails, and other stationary
objects when entering or exiting a curve. This is normal
operation. Your vehicle does not need service.
3-25
Other Vehicle Lane Changes
Using Adaptive Cruise Controls on Hills
If another vehicle enters the same lane as you, Adaptive
Cruise Control will not detect the vehicle until it is
completely in the lane. Be ready to take action and apply
the brakes yourself.
How well Adaptive Cruise Control works on hills depends
on your speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hills. It might not detect a vehicle in your
lane while driving on hills. While going up steep hills, you
might want to use the accelerator pedal to maintain your
vehicle speed. While going downhill, you might have to
brake to keep your vehicle speed down. Applying the
brake disengages the system. You may choose not to
use Adaptive Cruise Control on steep hills.
Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control
Apply the brake pedal or move the Adaptive Cruise
Control switch to off, to disengage the system. Adaptive
Cruise Control information does not appear on the
HUD while the system is not engaged.
3-26
Erasing Set Speed Memory
The set speed memory is erased when the Adaptive
Cruise Control switch or the ignition is turned off.
Other Messages
There are three messages that may appear on the DIC.
They are SERVICE RADAR CRUISE, CRUISE NOT
READY and CLEAN RADAR CRUISE. These messages
will only appear to indicate a problem with the Adaptive
Cruise Control. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-63 for more information.
You may also see CRUISE SPEED LIMITED displayed
in the HUD. See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-33
for more information.
Cleaning the System
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
If so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean the
lens, located on the driver’s side of the front fascia.
Clean the surface with a 50/50 mixture of isopropyl
alcohol and water on a dampened cloth. After cleaning
the fascia lens, try to engage Adaptive Cruise Control.
If this does not fix the problem, you may have to remove
the fascia lens and clean the inside of the fascia lens
and radar lens.
To clean the inside of the fascia lens and radar lens,
insert a tool into one of the small slots on the inboard
side of the lens and pop the lens out. Clean the surface
with a 50/50 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water
on a dampened cloth. After cleaning the lens, set the
lens back in place and press until it snaps in place.
3-27
Exterior Lamps
Turning the band to AUTO mode also enables the
Adaptive Forward Lighting system. See Adaptive Forward
Lighting System on page 3-30.
To override AUTO mode, turn the control to off.
To reset to AUTO mode turn the control to exterior lamps
and then back to AUTO. Automatic mode will also reset
when your vehicle is turned off and then back on again
when the control is left in the AUTO position.
See Twilight Sentinel® on page 3-31.
; (Parking Lamp):
Turning the band to this position
turns on the parking lamps together with the following:
The exterior lamp control is located to the left of the
steering wheel on the multifunction lever.
O (Exterior Lamp Control):
Turn the band with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp band has four positions:
O (Off):
Turning the band to this position turns off
all lamps.
AUTO (Automatic): Turning the band to this position
sets the exterior lamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode
will turn the exterior lamps on and off depending on how
much light is available outside the vehicle.
3-28
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
The parking brake indicator light will come on and stay
on when the parking lamps are on with the engine
off and the ignition to Acc.
5 (Headlamps):
Turning the control to this position
turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
This feature activates the headlamps and parking
lamps after the windshield wipers have been in use for
approximately six seconds and the multifunction lever is
in the AUTO position. See Exterior Lamps on page 3-28.
When the exterior lamp control has been turned off or is
in the parking lamp position and the wiper control is
on delay, low speed or high speed, the HEADLAMPS
SUGGESTED message will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off.
The DRL system makes the front turn signal lamps
come on when the following conditions are met:
• It is still daylight and the ignition is on.
• The exterior lamp control is in the off position.
• The transmission is not in PARK (P).
When DRL are on, only the front turn signal lamps are
on. No other exterior lamps such as the parking lamps,
taillamps, etc. are on when the DRL are used. Your
instrument panel is not be lit up either.
When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal
lamps turn off and normal low-beam headlamps turn on.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
When it is bright enough outside, the regular lamps go off,
and the front turn signal lamps take over. If you start your
vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic headlamp system
comes on immediately. Once you leave the garage, it
takes about one minute for the automatic headlamp
system to change to DRL if it is light outside. During that
delay, the instrument panel cluster might not be as bright
as usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness
knob is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel
Brightness on page 3-32 for more information.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
DRL are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
If it is dark enough outside and the exterior lamp control
is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message displays
on the Driver’s Information Center (DIC). This message
informs the driver that turning on the exterior lamps is
recommended. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-63.
Headlamps on Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
3-29
Turn the exterior lamp control off a second time,
or turn on the headlamps to turn off the HEADLAMPS
SUGGESTED message in the DIC. If the parking
lamps or the fog lamps were turned on instead, the
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message continues
to display.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when needed.
Adaptive Forward Lighting System
The Adaptive Forward Lighting System (AFS) swivels
the headlamps horizontally to provide greater road
illumination while turning. AFS will operate when the
vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h). AFS will
not operate when the transmission is in REVERSE (R).
AFS is not immediately operable after starting the
vehicle; driving a short distance is required to calibrate
the AFS. To enable AFS, set the exterior lamp switch
on the multifunction lever to the AUTO position. Moving
the switch out of the AUTO position will deactivate the
system. See Exterior Lamps on page 3-28.
3-30
Fog Lamps
Use fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions.
The fog lamps control is located on the multifunction
lever next to the exterior lamp control.
- (Fog Lamps):
Turning the band to this position will
turn the fog lamps on.
When you turn the fog lamps on, the fog lamp light will
appear on the instrument panel cluster to indicate
that the fog lamps and the parking lamps are on.
If you turn the high-beam headlamps on, the fog lamps
will turn off. They will turn on again when you switch
to low-beam headlamps.
The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to operate.
The fog lamps will turn off when the ignition is turned off.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps
to be on along with the fog lamps.
Twilight Sentinel®
Twilight Sentinel® can turn your lamps on and off
for you. A light sensor on top of the instrument panel
makes the Twilight Sentinel® work, so be sure it is
not covered.
With Twilight Sentinel® you will see the following
happen:
• When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal
lamps (DRL) will go off, and the headlamps and
parking lamps will come on. The other lamps
that come on with headlamps will also come on.
• When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps
will go off, and the front turn signal lamps (DRL)
will come on, as long as the exterior lamp switch
is in the AUTO position.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once you
leave the garage, it will take about one minute for the
automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is
light outside. During that delay, your instrument panel
cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure your
instrument panel brightness control is in full bright
position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-32
for more information.
You can idle the vehicle with the lamps off, even
when it is dark outside. After starting the vehicle, turn
the exterior lamp control band to off, then release it.
The lamps will remain off until you turn the control
band to off again.
Twilight Sentinel® also provides exterior illumination as
you leave the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel® has turned
on the lamps when you turn off the ignition, your lamps
will remain on until:
• The exterior lamp switch is moved from OFF to
the parking lamp position, or
• a delay time that you select has elapsed.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-60 to
select the delay time that you want. You can also select
no delay time.
If you turn off the ignition with the exterior lamp switch
in the parking lamp or headlamp position, the Twilight
Sentinel® delay will not occur. The lamps will turn off
as soon as the switch is turned off.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-31
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If the manual parking lamps or headlamps have been
left on, the exterior lamps will turn off as soon as
the ignition is turned off or Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. This protects against draining the
battery in case you have accidentally left the headlamps
or parking lamps on. The battery saver does not work
if the headlamps are turned on after the ignition switch
is turned to off.
If you need to leave the lamps on, use the exterior
lamp control to turn the lamps back on.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The button for this feature is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering column.
+!- (Brightness): Press this button to change the
brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Press the DIMMER button until PANEL DIMMING
appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Then
use the brightness button to adjust the instrument panel
brightness. Press the top of the button to brighten the
lights or the bottom of the button to dim the lights.
See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-33 for more
information.
3-32
Be sure not to have the brightness turned all the way
down with the lamps on during the day. Your DIC
may not be visible.
Courtesy Lamps
When any door or the trunk lid is opened, the interior
lamps will go on unless it is bright outside.
Press the interior lamp button on the right side of the
instrument panel, to turn the courtesy lamps on or off.
Entry/Exit Lighting
With entry lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
entering the vehicle. The interior lamps will come on
for about 20 seconds when the engine is turned off.
You can turn exit and entry lighting off by quickly turning
the courtesy lamps on and off.
Reading Lamps
Your inside rearview mirror includes two reading lamps.
The lamps will go on when a door is opened. When
the doors are closed, each lamp can be turned on
individually by pressing the button for that lamp.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent the battery
from being drained, in case the underhood lamp, vanity
mirror lamps, cargo lamps, reading lamps, console, or
glove box lamps are accidentally left on, or something is
left plugged into the accessory power outlet or cigarette
lighter. If any of the accessory lamps are left on, they will
automatically time-out after about 10 minutes. To reset
the battery protection, all of the above lamps must be
turned off or the ignition must be in the Acc. position.
Head-Up Display (HUD)
{CAUTION:
The information may be displayed in English or metric
units and appears as an image focused out toward
the front of your vehicle. To change from English
to metric units, see Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-60.
The HUD consists of the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Speedometer
Turn Signal Indicators
High-Beam Indicator Symbol
Tap-Up/Tap-Down Transmission Feature
Check Gages Icon
Adaptive Cruise Control Features and Indicators
Radio Features
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in
your field of view, it may take you more time to
see things you need to see when it is dark
outside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dim
and placed low in your field of view.
The Head-Up Display (HUD) allows you to see some of
the driver information that appears on your instrument
panel cluster.
3-33
The HUD controls are
located to the left of the
steering wheel.
Be sure to continue scanning your displays, controls
and driving environment just as you would in a vehicle
without HUD. If you never look at your instrument
panel cluster, you may not see something important,
such as a warning light. Under important warning
conditions, the CHECK GAGES message will display in
the HUD. View your Driver Information Center (DIC)
for more information.
3-34
+!- (Brightness): This button is used to adjust the
brightness of the HUD and the instrument panel cluster.
DIMMER: This button is used to select the HUD or
the instrument panel cluster to adjust the brightness.
HUD: This button is used to adjust the vertical position
of the HUD display.
To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly, do the
following:
1. Adjust the seat to a comfortable driving position.
If you change your seat position later, you may
have to re-adjust your HUD.
2. Start your engine and press the top or bottom of the
HUD button to center the HUD image in your view.
The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down,
not side-to-side.
3. Press the DIMMER button until the DIC reads HUD
DIMMING. Then use the brightness button to adjust
the desired intensity.
The brightness of the HUD image is determined by the
light conditions in the direction your vehicle is facing
and where you have the HUD set. If you are facing a
dark object or a heavily shaded area, your HUD
may anticipate that you are entering a dark area and
may begin to dim.
To turn off the HUD, press the brightness button down
until the image disappears.
Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD image
harder to see.
As light shines out from the HUD, it is possible for light to
shine back in. In rare occurrences, when the sun is at a
specific angle and position, the sun’s rays can shine back
into the HUD. When this occurs, the display device within
the HUD will be temporarily illuminated. The event will
end when the vehicle’s angle to the sun changes.
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove
any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity
of the HUD image.
To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on a
soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry
it. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because the
cleaner could leak into the unit.
If the ignition is on and you cannot see the HUD image,
check to see if:
• Something is covering the HUD unit.
• The brightness is adjusted properly.
• The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height.
• Ambient light in the direction your vehicle is facing
is low.
• A fuse is blown. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 6-90.
Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the HUD
system. See Windshield Replacement on page 6-50.
3-35
The following Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) messages
may appear in the HUD:
CRUISE SPEED LIMITED: This message indicates that
your vehicle speed has been reduced below your set
speed due to ACC limitations. Your set speed is too high
and ACC cannot detect other vehicles at far enough
distances for the system to operate properly.
TIGHT CURVE: This message indicates that ACC has
reduced your vehicle speed due to a tight curve in
the road. Once the road straightens, ACC will return to
your selected set speed or follow distance setting.
See “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” under Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8 for more
information.
You may also see an ACC active symbol, alert symbol
or vehicle ahead symbol. See “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
on page 3-8 for more information.
3-36
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlet can be used to connect
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or
CB radio.
The accessory power outlet is located inside the
center console storage compartment, on the forward
left side.
To use the outlet, remove the tethered cap. When not
using it, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
Notice: When using an accessory power outlet,
maximum electrical load must not exceed 20 amps.
Always turn off any electrical equipment when
not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain your vehicle’s battery.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
We recommend that you see a qualified technician or
your dealer for the proper installation of your equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug because the power outlets
are designed for accessory power plugs only.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
The ashtray and cigarette lighter are located under
a lid in the front console to the right of the shift lever.
Press the left side of the lid and it will open
automatically.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
Loose objects, such as paper clips, can lodge behind
and beneath the ashtray lid and prevent movement
of the lid. You should avoid putting small, loose objects
near the ashtray.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way and
let go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating does not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold
a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
3-37
Climate Controls
Dual Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling,
and ventilation for the vehicle.
When your vehicle is first started, the system will recall
the last temperature fan and mode settings for that driver.
3-38
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressed and
the temperature is set, the system will automatically
control the inside temperature, the air delivery mode,
the air conditioning compressor and the fan speed.
AUTO will appear on the display.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting
between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C). An initial
setting of 73°F (23°C) is suggested.
Choosing the warmest or coldest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any
faster. If you set the system at the warmest or
coldest temperature setting, the system will remain
in manual mode at that temperature and it will
not go into automatic mode.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan
speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system will
start out blowing air at the floor but may change
modes automatically as the vehicle warms up
to maintain the chosen temperature setting. The
length of time needed for warm up will depend on
the outside temperature and the length of time
that has elapsed since your vehicle was last driven.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature,
if necessary.
You can switch from English to metric units through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation
and Displays on page 3-60 for more information.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in
this section.
Manual Operation
w PWR x (Power/Temperature): Press the PWR
button on the left side of the climate control panel to turn
the entire climate control system on or off. Press the
up or down arrow on the switch to manually increase or
decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
Press the PWR button on the right side of the climate
control panel to turn the passenger’s climate control
system on or off. Press the up or down arrow on
the switch to manually increase or decrease the
temperature for the passenger.
If the passenger’s PWR button is off, the driver’s
temperature switch controls the temperature for the
entire vehicle.
«9ª(Fan):
Press this switch to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Pressing this switch cancels
automatic operation and places the system in manual
mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at
the highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter
may need to be replaced. For more information, see
Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-42
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-4.
ªN«(Mode): Pressing the switch and changing the
mode cancels automatic operation and places the
system in manual mode. Press the AUTO button to
return to automatic operation.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
% (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of the air to
the instrument panel outlets, and then directs most of the
remaining air to the floor outlets. In automatic operation,
cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air
to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the side window
outlets, and some of the air directed to the windshield.
The mode switch can also be used to select the
defog mode. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
3-39
A/C OFF (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn
off the air conditioning compressor. Press AUTO to
return to automatic operation. The compressor cannot
be turned off in either the defrost or floor/defog mode.
Sensors
( (Heated/Cooled Seat):
The solar sensor on your vehicle monitors the solar
radiation then uses the information to maintain the
selected temperature when operating in AUTO mode by
initiating needed adjustments to the temperature, the
fan speed and the air delivery system. The system may
also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing
the sun. The recirculation mode will also be activated, as
necessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located on
the top of the instrument panel near the windshield
or the system will not work properly.
Press this button to turn the
feature on. The button on the left controls the driver’s
seat and the button on the right controls the passenger’s
seat. Each press of the button will take you to a different
setting. The settings available in order are HI HEAT,
LO HEAT, OFF, HI COOL, LO COOL and OFF. You will
be able to feel the temperature change in a few minutes.
The feature will automatically turn off when the vehicle
is turned off.
There are sensors to measure the temperature and
sun’s effect on passenger comfort.
? (Recirculation):
Press this button to turn the
recirculation mode on or off. The air conditioning
compressor also comes on. This mode keeps outside
air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or to
help cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
There is also a sensor located behind the front bumper.
This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps
maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. The outside
temperature will be displayed in the navigation system
only when the engine is running. Any cover on the front of
the vehicle could give a false reading of the temperature.
Recirculation is not available in defrost or floor/defog
modes.
If the outside temperature goes up, the display
temperature will not change until:
Using recirculation for long periods of time may cause
the air inside your vehicle to become too dry. To prevent
this from happening, after the air in your vehicle has
cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
3-40
• The vehicle’s speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h)
for five minutes.
• The vehicle’s speed is above 32 mph (51 km/h)
for two and one-half minutes.
These delays prevent false readings. If the temperature
goes down, the outside temperature will be shown
when you start the vehicle. If it has been turned off for
less than three hours, the temperature will be recalled
from the previous vehicle operation.
There is also an inside temperature sensor located to
the left of the ignition button. The automatic climate
control system uses this sensor to receive information,
so if you block or cover it, the system will not function
properly.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass.
This can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or
frost from your windshield. Use the floor/defog mode
to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm
the passengers. Use defrost to remove fog or frost
from the windshield more quickly.
- (Floor/Defog): Press the mode button until the
defog mode appears on the display. This mode directs
the air between the windshield, floor outlets and
side windows. When you select this mode, the system
turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is near
or below freezing.
1 (Defrost):
Press this button to direct most of the
air to the windshield, with some air directed to the side
windows. In this mode, the system will automatically
turn off the recirculation and run the air conditioning
compressor, unless the outside temperature is near or
below freezing. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
engine is running.
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure to
clear as much snow from the rear window as possible.
The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed when traveling less than
30 mph (48 km/h). If turned on again, the defogger
will only run for about five minutes before turning off.
The defogger can also be turned off by pressing
the button again or by turning off the engine.
The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to
help clear fog or frost from the surface of the
mirrors when the rear window defogger is on.
3-41
The rear window defogger and heated mirrors are
automatically disabled when the retractable hardtop
is moving or down.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Do not attach
a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or
anything similar to the defogger grid.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the thumbwheel to open or close the outlets.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the area around the base of the instrument
panel console and air path under the seats
clear of objects to help circulate the air inside
of your vehicle more effectively.
3-42
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment air filter removes certain
particles from the air, including pollen and dust particles.
Reductions in airflow, which may occur more often in
dusty areas, indicate that the filter may need to be
replaced early.
The filter should be replaced as part of the routine
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7-4 for more information.
To check or replace the air filter, do the following:
1. With the hood open, unlatch and remove the
access panel.
The passenger compartment air filter and access
panel are located on the passenger’s side of
the engine compartment near the battery.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12
for more information on location.
2. Pull the old filter out of the housing.
3. Insert the new filter into the housing.
4. Reinstall the air filter access panel.
Warning Lights, Gages,
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to the warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As the
details show on the next few pages, some warning lights
come on briefly when you start the engine just to let
you know they are working. If you are familiar with
this section, you should not be alarmed when this
happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
as you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells
you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even
dangerous. So please get to know your vehicle’s
warning lights and gages. They can be a big help.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with warning lights and gages.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-63 for
more information.
3-43
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster and Driver Information Center (DIC) are designed to let you know at a glance how the
vehicle is running. You will know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have left and many other things
you will need to know to drive safely and economically. The instrument panel cluster indicator warning lights, gages
and DIC messages are explained on the following pages.
United States Base Cluster shown, Canada and Uplevel similar
3-44
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in either
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
The trip odometer is part of the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Operation and Displays on
page 3-60 for more information.
There is only one scale for mph and km/h.
Use the Driver Information Center (DIC) controls to
switch between mph and km/h. See DIC Operation
and Displays on page 3-60 for more information.
The cluster will calculate the proper speed and move
the needle to the correct position. Either the MPH
or the km/h telltale will illuminate, depending on which
measurement you choose.
The odometer is part of the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-60 for more information.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands
of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Fuel will shut off at about 6700 rpm.
If you continue to drive your vehicle at the fuel shut off
rpm, you could damage your engine. Be sure to
operate your vehicle below the fuel shut off rpm or
reduce your rpm quickly when the fuel shuts off.
3-45
Safety Belt Reminders
Airbag Readiness Light
Safety Belt Reminder Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 1-36.
When the engine is started, a chime will come on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s
belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will come on.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
The light should go out
and the system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start
the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
3-46
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you start the engine. If the light does not
come on then, have it fixed immediately. If there is a
problem with the airbag system, an airbag Driver
Information Center (DIC) message may also come on.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-63 for
more information.
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system. Your
rearview mirror has a passenger airbag status indicator.
United States
Canada
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator will
light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol,
to let you know the status to let you know the status of
the right front passenger’s frontal and seat-mounted
side impact airbags.
3-47
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag are enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned
off the passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating airbag. Do not use
a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat if the airbag is turned on.
3-48
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped) if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is fail-safe,
and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is or airbags are off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-45 for more
on this, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-46 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Charging System Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn
on the ignition, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show
you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. A charging system
Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also
appear. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-63
for more information. This light could indicate that you
have problems with a generator drive belt, or another
electrical problem. Have it checked right away.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as
the radio and air conditioner.
3-49
Voltmeter Gage
Brake System Warning Light
When the vehicle is in
accessory mode, the
voltmeter shows the
voltage output of your
battery. When the engine
is running, it shows
the voltage output of
the charging system.
The reading will change as the rate of charge changes
(with engine speed, for example), but if the voltmeter
reads at 9 volts or below, your instrument panel
cluster and other systems may shut down. The Driver
Information Center (DIC) will read LOW VOLTAGE when
your vehicle is at 10 volts or below. Have it checked
right away. Driving with the voltmeter reading at
10 volts or below could drain your battery and disable
your vehicle.
3-50
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
United States
Canada
This light should come on when you start the engine.
If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If this warning light stays on after you start the engine,
the parking brake may still be set or there could be
a brake problem. Refer to Parking Brake on page 2-30
to see if it is set. If the parking brake is not set, have
your brake system inspected right away.
If the light comes on while you are driving and you have
a LOW BRAKE FLUID message showing on the DIC,
pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice
that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may
go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop.
If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service.
See Towing Your Vehicle on page 5-27.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning
light on can lead to an accident. If the light
is still on after you have pulled off the road
and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
for service.
Antilock Brake System
Warning Light
For vehicles with
the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this
light will come on
briefly when you
start the engine.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
not have antilock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have antilock
brakes and there is a problem with your regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-50
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-63 for
all brake related DIC messages.
3-51
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
This light should
come on briefly as
you start the engine.
If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
The light will also come on while the StabiliTrak® system
warms up and the STABILITRAK WARMING message
will be displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
If it stays on, or comes on and the DIC shows a
SERVICE TRACTION SYS message when you are
driving, there is a problem with your Traction Control
System (TCS) and your vehicle needs service.
When this light is on, the system will not limit wheel
spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. If the driver turns
off TCS by pressing the button on the console, the
TCS light will come on and the TRACTION SYSTEM
OFF message will show on the DIC.
3-52
If the light stays on or comes on while you are driving,
a chime sounds and a SERVICE STABILITRAK
message appears on the DIC, there is a problem with
your StabiliTrak® and the vehicle needs service.
You can acknowledge this message by pressing the
RESET button. When the SERVICE STABILITRAK
message is displayed, the StabiliTrak® system will not
assist you in controlling the vehicle. You should have the
system serviced as soon as possible. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
When the system is working, you will see the
STABILITRAK ACTIVE message displayed in the DIC.
You may also feel of hear the system working.
This is normal.
If you turn off the StabiliTrak® system, by pressing the
front part of the button on the console for five seconds,
the TCS light will come on, a chime will sound and
the TRAC/STABILITRAK OFF message will be
displayed in the DIC. The TCS will also be turned off.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-63
for more information.
If the StabiliTrak® system and TCS are turned off,
pressing the console button momentarily will
turn both systems on. The DIC will display the
TRAC/STABILITRAK ON message, the instrument
cluster light will be off and a chime will sound.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-63 for
more information.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Tire Pressure Light
This light will come
on briefly when the
engine is started.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
As the pointer nears 260°F (125°C), your engine coolant
temperature is high. A message may display on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) depending on how high
the temperature is. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-63 for more information.
See Engine Overheating on page 6-27 for more
information.
This light will also come on when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure Driver Information Center (DIC) message
will accompany the light, see Other Messages on
page 3-74 for more information.
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to
do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.
See Tires on page 6-52 for more information.
If a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor
System, this light will flash for approximately 60 seconds
and then stay on solid for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6-61
for more information.
3-53
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It makes sure that emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
The check engine light
comes on to indicate
that there is an OBD II
problem and service
is required.
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 6-3.
This light comes on briefly, as a check to show it is
working, as you start the engine. If the light does not
come on, have it repaired. This light also comes
on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
3-54
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system
on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might
be required.
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following can prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the engine off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the
cap. See Filling the Tank on page 6-7. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. The
condition is usually corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 6-5. Poor fuel quality causes
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn
off, your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have developed.
3-55
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or might begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
To perform a check engine light bulb check with the
keyless ignition, make sure the transmitter fob is
in the passenger compartment. See Ignition Positions
on page 2-23. Press the bottom of the Acc. button
on the instrument panel and hold the button down for
five seconds. The instrument panel, including the check
engine light, will light up and the ignition will be on,
3-56
but the engine will not start — if you press the bottom
of the Acc. button only briefly, less than five seconds,
the accessory power mode will be turned on, but not
the ignition. After the bulb check, be sure to press and
release the Acc. button again to turn the ignition off
and avoid draining the vehicle’s battery.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would
be considered not ready for inspection. This can
happen if you have recently replaced the battery or
if the battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD system readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare
the vehicle for inspection.
Engine Oil Pressure Gage
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
United States
Canada
The engine oil pressure gage shows the engine oil
pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals) when the engine is running.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
Oil pressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to 550 kPa).
In certain situations such as long, extended idles on
hot days, it could read as low as 6 psi (40 kPa) and still
be considered normal. It may vary with engine speed,
outside temperature and oil viscosity. The Driver
Information Center (DIC) may display messages
regarding the oil condition. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-63 and Engine Oil on page 6-16.
3-57
Security Light
Lights On Reminder
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
Theft-Deterrent System
on page 2-19.
This light comes
on whenever the
headlamps are on.
United States Only
Fog Lamp Light
See Horn on page 3-6 for more information.
The fog lamp light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-30 for more information.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9
for more information.
3-58
Fuel Gage
Your fuel gage tells
you about how much
fuel you have left when
the ignition is on.
Press RESET to acknowledge a DIC message(s).
Pressing RESET will also turn off a DIC message
but the LOW FUEL message will come on again in
10 minutes if you have not added fuel to the vehicle.
Here are five things that some owners ask about.
All these things are normal and do not indicate that
anything is wrong with the fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads the full symbol.
• It takes more (or less) fuel to fill up than the
gage reads. For example, the gage reads half full,
but it took more (or less) than half of the tank’s
capacity to fit it.
When the needle approaches the low fuel symbol,
LOW FUEL will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. At this time, you still have a
little fuel left, but you should get more soon.
• The gage pointer may move while cornering,
braking or speeding up.
• The gage may not indicate the tank is empty when
the ignition is turned off.
• The gage reading may change slightly within the
first several minutes after starting the vehicle.
3-59
You can use the Driver Information Center (DIC) to
display more detailed fuel information. While scrolling
through the DIC, you will also find:
• AVERAGE XX.X MPG (Average Miles Per Gallon):
The fuel economy calculated for the last 20 gallons
(76 L) of fuel used, or since you last reset the display.
• INST XX.X MPG (Instantaneous Miles Per Gallon):
The fuel economy calculated for your current driving
conditions.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
This display gives you the status of many of your
vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display driver
personalization features and warning/status messages.
All messages will appear in the DIC display, located
at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.
DIC Operation and Displays
• RANGE XXX MI: The approximate distance you can
The Driver Information
Center (DIC) buttons are
located to the right of
the steering wheel on
the instrument panel,
near the air outlets.
drive before refueling.
See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-60 for
more information.
You should reset the fuel information display every
time you refuel. To reset AVERAGE, use the information
up or down button to scroll to AVE FUEL ECON and
hold the reset button. RANGE will automatically reset.
« 4 ª (Information):
Press the top or bottom of this
button to scroll through the available features which
include the odometer, trip odometers, fuel range,
miles per gallon, average speed, timer, tire pressure,
and remaining oil life.
3-60
+ (Interior Lamps): Press this button to turn the
interior lamps on and off.
OPTIONS: Press this button to choose personal
options that are available on your vehicle.
RESET: Press this button to reset a feature. It is also
used to switch between English and Metric options.
Use the information button to scroll through the
following options:
ODOMETER: This feature shows how far the vehicle
has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
Use the ENG/METRIC feature to switch between
English and Metric units.
TRIP A: This feature will record the distance traveled
since the last time it was reset. Press and hold the
RESET button to return to zero. If your vehicle is first
sold in the United States, the trip odometer will return
to zero after 999.9 miles (1 609 km). If your vehicle
is first sold in Canada, the trip odometer will return to
zero after 1,242 miles (1 999 km).
RANGE xxx MI: This feature shows about how many
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) you can drive without
refilling your fuel tank. Once the range drops below
40 miles (64 km) remaining, the display will show LOW.
If the vehicle has been idling for a long time, the
range displayed on the DIC could be abnormally low.
The vehicle must be driven 5-10 miles (8-16 km) to
get an accurate reading.
AVERAGE xx.x MPG (Average Miles Per Gallon):
This feature shows the approximate fuel economy the
vehicle has averaged since the last time the value
was reset. To reset the average miles per gallon, press
the information button to display AVERAGE xx.x MPG,
then press and hold the RESET button until AVERAGE
00.0 MPG is displayed.
INST xx.x MPG (Instantaneous Miles Per Gallon):
This feature shows the instantaneous fuel economy
which varies with your driving conditions, such as
acceleration, braking, and the grade of the road being
traveled. The RESET button does not function in
this mode.
TRIP B: This feature allows you to record the distance
traveled during a second trip and functions the same
as TRIP A.
3-61
AVERAGE SPEED: This feature shows the average
speed the vehicle has traveled since the last time
the value was reset. To reset the value, press the
information button to display AVERAGE SPEED, then
press and hold the RESET button until AVERAGE
SPEED 00.0 is displayed.
ELAPSED TIME: This feature is like a stopwatch, in
that you can clock the time it takes to get from one point
to another.
To operate, press the information button to display
ELAPSED TIME. Each of the fields for the hours,
minutes, and seconds are two numeric digits.
Once ELAPSED TIME 00:00:00 is displayed, press the
RESET button to start the timing feature. Press the
RESET button again to stop it. If you will be starting and
stopping your vehicle, during a trip for instance, the
ELAPSED TIME feature will automatically start timing
where it left off when you last stopped. To reset it,
press and hold the RESET button until the display
reads ELAPSED TIME 00:00:00. Press the information
button to exit from the ELAPSED TIME display.
3-62
FRONT Lxx Rxx PSI: This feature shows the tire
pressure for the front left and right tires.
REAR Lxx Rxx PSI: This feature shows the tire
pressure for the rear left and right tires.
OIL LIFE: This feature shows the estimated oil life
remaining. See Oil Life Indicator on page 3-80 for more
information. To reset the engine oil life system, see
Engine Oil Life System on page 6-20. This only needs
to be reset after you have had the oil changed.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring oil
life, additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7-4 and Engine Oil on page 6-16
for more information.
ENG/METRIC (English/Metric): This feature allows
you to switch the DIC displays between English
and Metric. Press the RESET button to switch the
display between English and Metric. There will be
an arrow next to the option that is selected.
DIC Warnings and Messages
BUCKLE PASSENGER
These messages appear if there is a problem detected
in one of your vehicle’s systems. You must then
press RESET to clear the display screen for further use.
However, be sure to take any message that appears
on the display screen seriously and remember that
pressing the RESET button will only make the message
disappear, not the problem.
This message reminds you to buckle the passenger’s
safety belt.
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt is buckled, the
passenger’s safety belt is unbuckled with the passenger
airbag enabled, and the vehicle is in motion. You
should have the passenger buckle their safety belt.
DIC messages can also be displayed in English,
French, German, Italian, Japanese, and Spanish.
The reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on, the
vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckled and the
passenger is still unbuckled, and the passenger airbag
is enabled. If the passenger’s safety belt is already
buckled, this message and chime will not come on.
ABS (Antilock Brake System) ACTIVE
This message displays when the Antilock Brake
System (ABS) is adjusting brake pressure to help
avoid a braking skid.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message
displays, so adjust your driving accordingly.
The message may stay on for a few seconds after
the system stops adjusting brake pressure.
BUCKLE SEAT BELT
This message reminds you to buckle the driver’s
safety belt.
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled,
and the vehicle is in motion. You should buckle your
safety belt.
3-63
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition is
on and the vehicle is in motion, the reminder will
be repeated. If the driver’s safety belt is already buckled,
this message and chime will not come on.
This message is an additional reminder to the Safety
Belt Reminder Light in the instrument panel cluster.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-46 for more
information.
CHANGE OIL NOW
This message displays when the life of the engine oil
has expired. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-4.
After an oil change, the Oil Life Indicator must be
reset. See Oil Life Indicator on page 3-80 and Engine
Oil Life System on page 6-20.
CHARGE SYSTEM FAULT
This message displays when a problem with the
charging system has been detected. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been
fully tightened. Check the fuel cap to make sure that
it is on properly.
3-64
CLEAN RADAR CRUISE
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays
when the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system is
disabled because the radar is blocked and cannot
detect vehicles in your path. It may also activate during
heavy rain or due to road spray. To clean the system,
see Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-15.
CLOSE CARGO DIVIDER
This message displays if the cargo divider is not in
place. Open the trunk and make sure the cargo divider
is secure and no objects are on the divider. See
Rear Storage Area on page 2-53 for more information.
COOLANT OVER TEMP (Temperature)
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow your vehicle to
idle in PARK (P) until it cools down and the message
is removed. Do not increase engine speed above
a normal idle. If it does not cool down, turn off the
engine and have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer before driving it again. Severe engine
damage can result from an overheated engine.
See Engine Overheating on page 6-27.
CRUISE NOT READY
This message indicates that the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) will not activate due to a temporary condition.
Your vehicle does not require service. If this message
displays when you attempt to activate the system,
continue driving for several minutes, then try to activate
the system again.
ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCE
ENGINE RPM
If this message displays, the control system has
determined that continued operation at the existing
engine speed may lead to engine overheating.
Lower the engine speed by upshifting the transmission
or drive at a lower speed.
DRIVER NO. X (1 OR 2)
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
This message displays when the vehicle is started or
when there is a change of driver. The message
shows which driver is activating the personalization
feature. It will only stay on for five seconds.
This message displays if it is dark enough outside and
the headlamps and Twilight Sentinel® controls are
off. This message informs the driver that turning on the
exterior lamps is recommended. It has become dark
enough outside to require the headlamps and/or other
exterior lamps. This message also displays if the
optional Rainsense™ wiping feature is on and the
Twilight Sentinel® is off.
ENGINE HOT, STOP ENGINE
This message displays when the engine has overheated.
Stop and turn the engine off immediately to avoid
severe engine damage. See Engine Overheating
on page 6-27. A multiple chime also sounds when this
message displays.
HIGH TRANS (Transmission) TEMP
(Temperature)
This message displays when the transmission fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop and allow your vehicle
to idle until it cools down or until this message is
removed.
3-65
HIGH VOLTAGE
LEFT DOOR AJAR
This message displays when the electrical charging
system is overcharging. To avoid being stranded, have
the electrical system checked by your dealer/retailer.
You can reduce the charging overload by using
the accessories. Turn on the lamps and radio, set the
climate control on AUTO and the fan speed on HI,
and turn the rear window defogger on. You can monitor
battery voltage on the DIC by pressing the information
button. The normal range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts when the
engine is running.
This message displays anytime the engine is running,
the transmission is not in PARK (P), and the driver door
is open or ajar. A chime sounds when the vehicle’s
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
HOT ENGINE–A/C OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
You can continue to drive your vehicle. If this message
continues to display, have the system repaired by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible to avoid
compressor damage.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
3-66
LOW BRAKE FLUID
This message displays if the engine is running to inform
the driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have the
brake system serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible. See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes on
page 6-37.
LOW COOLANT
This message displays when there is a low level of
engine coolant. Have the cooling system serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible. See Engine
Coolant on page 6-24.
LOW FUEL
This message displays when the fuel supply is less
than 5 gallons (18.9 L) and the display is turned off.
A single chime also sounds when this message is
displayed.
LOW OIL LEVEL
For correct operation of the low oil sensing system,
your vehicle should be on a level surface. A false
LOW OIL LEVEL message may display if the vehicle
is parked on a grade. The oil level sensing system does
not check for actual oil level if the engine has been
off for a short period of time, and the oil level is never
checked while the engine is running. If the LOW
OIL LEVEL message displays, and your vehicle has
been parked on level ground with the engine off for at
least 30 minutes, the oil level should be checked by
observing the oil dipstick. Prior to checking the oil level,
make sure the engine has been off for a few minutes
and your vehicle is on a level surface. Then check
the dipstick and add oil if necessary. See Engine Oil
on page 6-16.
LOW OIL PRESSURE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
See Engine Oil on page 6-16 for more information.
If this message displays while the engine is running,
stop the engine and do not operate the vehicle until the
cause of low oil pressure is corrected. Severe damage
to the engine can result. A multiple chime sounds when
this message is displayed.
LOW VOLTAGE
This message displays when the electrical system
is charging less than 10 volts or if the battery has been
drained. If this message displays immediately after
starting, it is possible that the generator can still
recharge the battery. The battery should recharge while
driving, but may take a few hours to do so. Consider
using an auxiliary charger to boost the battery after
returning home or to a final destination. Make sure you
follow the manufacturer’s instructions. If this message
displays while driving or after starting your vehicle
and stays on, have it checked immediately by your
dealer/retailer to determine the cause of this problem.
To help the generator recharge the battery quickly,
you can reduce the load on the electrical system
by turning off the accessories. You can monitor battery
voltage on the DIC by pressing the INFO button.
The normal range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
3-67
LOW WASHER FLUID
NO FOB DETECTED
This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as
soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 6-12 for the location of the windshield
washer fluid reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer
Fluid on page 6-36 for more information.
This message displays if the vehicle does not detect the
presence of a keyless access transmitter when you
have attempted to start the vehicle or a vehicle door has
just closed. The following conditions may cause this
message to appear:
MAX (Maximum) SPEED
XX MPH (XX KM/H)
This message displays when a failure in the magnetic
ride control system has occurred. The Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) determines the speed to which
your vehicle is limited. Have your vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer if this message appears.
• Driver-added equipment plugged into the accessory
power outlet on the center console is causing
interference. Examples of these devices are cell
phones and cell phone chargers, two-way radios,
power inverters, or similar items. Try moving the
keyless access transmitter away from these devices
when starting the vehicle. In addition, PDA devices
and remote garage and gate openers may also
generate Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) that
may interfere with the keyless access transmitter.
Do not carry the keyless access transmitter in the
same pocket or bag as these devices.
• The vehicle is experiencing Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI). Some locations, such as airports,
automatic toll booths, and some gas stations, have
EMI fields which may interfere with your keyless
access transmitter.
3-68
NO FOB, OFF OR RUN?
If moving the transmitter to different locations within
the vehicle does not help, place the transmitter in the
glove box transmitter pocket with the buttons facing
to the right and then press the START button.
• The vehicle’s battery voltage is low. The battery
voltage must be above 10 volts for the keyless
access transmitter to be detected properly.
This message displays when a keyless access
transmitter is not detected inside the vehicle while you
are trying to turn the ignition off. Your vehicle may be
near a strong radio antenna signal causing the keyless
access system to be jammed. The vehicle will remain in
ACCESSORY until the vehicle is turned off or is restarted,
or five minutes has expired. If you turn the ignition off and
you cannot find the keyless access transmitter, you will
not be able to restart the vehicle. The keyless access
transmitter needs to be inside of the vehicle in order for
the vehicle to start. See Starting the Engine on page 2-24
for more information.
OVER SPEED WARNING
This message displays when the vehicle speed exceeds
a certain limit as required by some export countries.
A chime sounds when this message is displayed.
PRESS BRAKE TO START
This message displays to inform you that the brake
pedal must be applied to start the vehicle. Make sure
you are pressing the brake pedal all the way down.
3-69
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
SERVICE ABS (Antilock Brake System)
This message displays when the vehicle is reducing
engine power because the transmission is being placed
in gear under conditions that may cause damage to
the vehicle’s engine, transmission, or ability to
accelerate. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed
to your destination. The performance may be reduced
the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may
be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken
to your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
If this message displays when you are driving, stop
as soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start
the engine again to reset the system. If the message
stays on, or comes back on again while you are driving,
your vehicle is in need of service. See your
dealer/retailer.
RIGHT DOOR AJAR
This message displays anytime the engine is running,
the transmission is not in PARK (P), and the passenger
door is open or ajar. A chime sounds if the vehicle’s
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
SERVICE A/C
This message displays when the electronic sensors that
control the air conditioning and heating systems are
no longer working. Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer/retailer if you notice a drop in
heating and air conditioning efficiency.
3-70
If the SERVICE ABS message is being displayed, the
Traction Control System (TCS) and StabiliTrak® System
will also be disabled. The Driver Information Center
will scroll three messages: SERVICE ABS, SERVICE
TRACTION SYS, and SERVICE STABILITRAK, and the
antilock brake system and traction control warning
lights on the instrument panel cluster will be illuminated.
See Antilock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-51
and Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 3-52. The driver can acknowledge these messages
by pressing the RESET button three times. When the
service message is displayed, the computer controlled
systems will not assist the driver and you should
have the system repaired by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible. Adjust your driving accordingly.
SERVICE AFS (Adaptive Forward
Lighting System) LAMPS
This message displays when the Adaptive Forward
Lighting System (AFS) is disabled and needs service.
See your dealer/retailer. See Adaptive Forward Lighting
System on page 3-30 for more information.
SERVICE ELECT (Electrical) SYSTEM
This message displays if an electrical problem has
occurred within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL
This message displays when there is a problem with
the Magnetic Ride Control System. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE TRACTION SYS (System)
This message displays when there is a problem with
the Traction Control System (TCS). Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
This message displays when the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) has detected a problem within the
fuel system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. This message will also be displayed
when the cluster is not getting fuel information from
the PCM.
If this message displays, it means there may be a
problem with the stability enhancement system.
If you see this message, try to reset the system.
Stop, turn off the engine, then start the engine again.
If this message still comes on, it means there is a
problem. You should see your dealer/retailer for service.
Reduce your speed and drive accordingly. A single
chime also sounds when this message is displayed.
SERVICE RADAR CRUISE
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays
when the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system is
disabled and needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
This message displays when there is a problem with
the transmission. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM
3-71
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions related
powertrain malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SHIFT TO PARK
This message displays if the vehicle is not in PARK (P)
when the engine is being turned off. The vehicle will
be in accessory mode. Once the shift lever is moved
to PARK (P), the vehicle will turn off.
STABILITRAK ACTIVE
You may see this message on the DIC. It means that
an advanced, computer-controlled system has come on
to help your vehicle continue to go in the direction in
which you are steering. This stability enhancement
system activates when the computer senses that your
vehicle is just starting to spin, as it might if you hit
a patch of ice or other slippery spot on the road.
When the system is on, you may hear a noise or
feel a vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal.
3-72
When this message is on, continue to steer in the
direction you want to go. The system is designed to
help you in bad weather or other difficult driving situations
by making the most of whatever road conditions will
permit. If this message comes on, you will know that
something has caused your vehicle to start to spin,
so consider slowing down. A single chime also sounds
when this message is displayed.
STABILITRAK READY
If this message displays and a chime sounds, the
system has completed the functional check of the
StabiliTrak® System.
STABILITRAK WARMING
When you first start your vehicle and drive away,
especially during cold winter weather, this message
may display along with a chime and the traction control
warning light. This is normal. You can acknowledge
this message by pressing the RESET button. The
StabiliTrak® System performance is affected until the
STABILITRAK READY message is displayed in the DIC,
which can take up to 15 minutes.
SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on
page 3-53. Several conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 6-63 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
TOO COLD TO MOVE TOP
This message displays when the retractable hardtop
button is pressed and the hardtop pump motor
temperature is below −4°F (−20°C). Wait for the hardtop
pump motor to warm up before using the retractable
hardtop.
TOP INOP (Inoperative) – VALET ON
This message displays when the retractable hardtop
button is pressed and the valet switch is on. Turn off
the valet switch before using the retractable hardtop.
TOP INOP (Inoperative) OUT OF PARK
This message displays if the retractable hardtop
button is pressed while the vehicle is not in PARK (P).
TOP MOTOR OVER TEMP
(Temperature)
This message displays when the retractable hardtop
button is pressed and the hardtop pump motor
temperature is over 221°F (105°C). Wait for the hardtop
pump motor to cool down before using the retractable
hardtop.
TOP NOT SECURE
This message displays when the retractable hardtop
button is released before the top open or close operation
is complete. Press and hold the retractable hardtop
button to fully open or close the top.
TRAC (Traction) SYSTEM ACTIVE
This message displays when the Traction Control System
(TCS) is limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may
exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your driving
accordingly. This message stays on for a few seconds
after the TCS stops limited wheel spin.
TRAC (Traction)/STABILITRAK OFF
This message displays when both the Traction Control
System (TCS) and the StabiliTrak® System are off.
This message will remain until the systems are turned
on again.
3-73
TRAC (Traction)/STABILITRAK ON
Other Messages
This message displays when both the Traction Control
System (TCS) and the StabiliTrak® System are on.
Here are more messages that you can receive on the
Driver Information Center (DIC). To acknowledge a
message and read another message that may have
come on at the same time, press the RESET button.
TRACTION SYSTEM OFF
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is off, but the StabiliTrak® System
remains on.
TRACTION SYSTEM ON
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is on.
TRUNK AJAR
This message displays when the trunk is open while
the vehicle is running and is not in PARK (P).
WAIT FOR STABILITRAK
This message displays after driving 19 mph (30 km/h)
for 10 seconds if the steering is not centered.
The StabiliTrak® System is not available until the
steering centers itself and the STABILITRAK READY
message is displayed in the DIC.
• ACCESSORY MODE ON
See Ignition Positions on page 2-23.
• CHANGE OIL SOON
See Engine Oil on page 6-16 and Engine Oil
Life System on page 6-20.
• FOB BATTERY LOW
See “Battery Replacement” under Keyless
Access System Operation on page 2-6.
• HIGH TIRE PRESS LF
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-60.
• HIGH TIRE PRESS RF
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-60.
• HIGH TIRE PRESS LR
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-60.
• HIGH TIRE PRESS RR
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-60.
3-74
• INTRUSION SENSOR OFF
See Theft-Deterrent System on page 2-19.
• INTRUSION SENSOR ON
See Theft-Deterrent System on page 2-19.
• KNOWN FOB
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
Keyless Access System Operation on page 2-6.
• LEFT FRONT TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,
REDUCED HNDLG
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-60.
• LEFT REAR TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,
REDUCED HNDLG
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-60.
• LOW TIRE PRESS LF
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-60.
• LOW TIRE PRESS RF
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-60.
• LOW TIRE PRESS LR
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-60.
• LOW TIRE PRESS RR
• MAX # FOBS LEARNED
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
under Keyless Access System Operation
on page 2-6.
• OFF-ACC TO LEARN
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
under Keyless Access System Operation
on page 2-6.
• READY FOR FOB #X
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
under Keyless Access System Operation
on page 2-6.
• RIGHT FRT TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,
REDUCED HNDLG
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-60.
• RIGHT REAR TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,
REDUCED HNDLG
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-60.
• WAIT XX MINUTES
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
under Keyless Access System Operation
on page 2-6.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-60.
3-75
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to a preferred setting
for up to two drivers. The back of the keyless access
transmitters are labelled 1 or 2.
The current driver’s preferences are recalled when one
of the following occurs:
• The lock or unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter, programmed as 1 or 2, is pressed.
• The appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located on
the driver’s seat is pressed. See Memory Seat,
Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 1-3 for more
information.
• A valid keyless access transmitter is detected upon
opening the driver’s door.
If more than one valid keyless access transmitter is
detected upon opening the driver’s door, the driver
preferences for the lowest driver number will be recalled.
If a keyless access transmitter is programmed
as #3 or #4, the personalization system will not
recognize the transmitter. The Driver Information
Center (DIC) will not display a current driver number
and the features that are normally programmed
through the DIC will be set to the default states.
3-76
Also, if the OPTIONS button is pressed, the DIC does
not display the menus used to set personalizations,
but instead displays OPTIONS UNAVAILABLE for
a few seconds.
Feature Programming
To change feature preferences, make sure the vehicle
is running and in PARK (P). To avoid excessive drain
on the battery, it is recommended that the headlamps
are turned off. Press the OPTIONS button and the
Driver Information Center (DIC) will display the
current driver for a few seconds, then display the
first personalization menu item. You can now use the
OPTIONS button to change the setting of the displayed
feature. Press the top or bottom of the information
button to scroll up or down the list of features. When
you get to a feature you want to change, press the
OPTIONS button again. When you are finished, press
the RESET button to exit the personalization menu.
If no button is pressed within 45 seconds, the DIC will
exit the personalization menu.
The following are DIC options that will be available in
the personalization menu.
Auto Recall
Approach Lights
This feature allows the steering column, outside mirrors
and the driver’s seat to automatically move to the current
driver’s set position when the engine starts. The DIC will
display AUTO RECALL OFF or AUTO RECALL ON.
Press the OPTIONS button to change the setting.
This feature activates the parking lamps, front fog lamps
and back-up lamps during low light periods when the
unlock button on the keyless access transmitter is
pressed, both doors are closed and the vehicle is off or
in RAP. The lamps remain on for 20 seconds or until
a door is opened, the lock button on the keyless access
transmitter is pressed or the vehicle is no longer off
or in RAP.
Auto Exit Recall
This feature allows the steering column and driver’s
seat to automatically move to the current driver’s
exit position when one of the following occurs:
• The vehicle is turned off or in RAP or accessory
mode and the driver’s door is opened.
• The vehicle is turned off or in RAP and the
unlock button on the keyless access transmitter
is pressed.
The DIC will display AUTO EXIT RECALL OFF or
AUTO EXIT RECALL ON. Press the OPTIONS
button to change the setting.
The DIC will display APPROACH LIGHTS OFF or
APPROACH LIGHTS ON. Press the OPTIONS button
to change the setting.
Exit Lights
This feature activates the parking lamps and front fog
lamps for 15, 30 or 90 seconds. This will occur when
the vehicle is off or in RAP and the headlamps are on
due to the automatic headlamp system. The parking
lamps and front fog lamps will remain on until the driver
selected time period expires, the exterior lamp control
is activated or the vehicle is no longer off or in RAP.
The DIC will display EXIT LIGHTS OFF, EXIT
LIGHTS - 15 SEC, EXIT LIGHTS - 30 SEC, or
EXIT LIGHTS - 90 SEC. Press the OPTIONS button
to change the setting.
3-77
Flash at Unlock
FOB Reminder
This feature activates the front and rear turn signals for
two short flashes when the unlock or trunk button on
the keyless access transmitter is pressed. This will only
occur when the vehicle is off.
This feature sounds the horn three times when
the driver door is closed and there is a keyless
access transmitter inside the interior of the vehicle.
This will only occur when the vehicle is off.
The DIC will display NO FLASH AT UNLOCK or
FLASH AT UNLOCK. Press the OPTIONS button to
change the setting.
The DIC will display FOB REMINDER OFF or
FOB REMINDER HORN. Press the OPTIONS button
to change the setting.
Flash at Lock
Passive Locking
This feature activates the front and rear turn signals for
one long flash when the lock button on the keyless
access transmitter is pressed. This will only occur when
the vehicle is off. If the lock button is pressed again
within five seconds, the horn will sound regardless of
which setting you have selected.
The DIC will display NO FLASH AT LOCK or
FLASH AT LOCK. Press the OPTIONS button to
change the setting.
3-78
This feature allows you to select whether the doors
automatically lock during normal vehicle exit. When the
ignition is turned off and all doors become closed,
the vehicle will determine how many keyless access
transmitters remain in the vehicle interior. If at least
one keyless access transmitter has been removed
from the interior of the vehicle, the doors will lock
after eight seconds.
For example, if there are two keyless access
transmitters in the vehicle and one is removed, the
other will be locked in. The keyless access transmitter
locked in the vehicle can still be used to start the vehicle
or unlock the doors, if needed. A person approaching
the outside of the locked vehicle without an authorized
keyless access transmitter, however, will not be able
to open the door, even with a transmitter in the vehicle.
You may temporarily disable the passive door locking
feature by pressing the door unlock switch for
three seconds on an open door. Passive door locking
will then remain disabled until a door lock switch is
pressed or until the power mode transitions from
the off power mode.
You can select to not have the horn sound when the
passive lock occurs. If you choose this setting, the doors
will automatically lock eight seconds after you turn the
ignition off, remove a keyless access transmitter
from the interior of the vehicle, and close both doors.
You can also select to have the horn sound once when
the passive lock occurs. If you choose this setting,
the doors will automatically lock and the horn will chirp
eight seconds after you turn the ignition off, remove
a keyless access transmitter from the interior of
the vehicle, and close both doors.
If you are parking in a quiet area and do not want the
horn to sound when the doors lock, press the lock button
on the keyless access transmitter immediately after
removing it from the interior and closing the doors.
This will lock the doors and cancel the passive locking
for this ignition cycle.
The DIC will display PASSIVE LOCKING OFF, SILENT
PASSIVE LOCK, or HORN AT PASSIVE LOCK.
Press the OPTIONS button to change the setting.
Passive Unlocking
This feature allows you to select which doors will
automatically unlock when you approach and open the
driver’s door with your keyless access transmitter.
You can choose to have the driver’s door unlock or
both doors unlock. See Door Locks on page 2-10
for more information.
The DIC will display PASSIVE UNLK DRIVER or
PASSIVE UNLK BOTH. Press the OPTIONS button
to change this setting.
Auto Unlock
This feature automatically unlocks either the driver’s
door or both doors, depending on the setting, when
the shift lever is moved to PARK (P).
The DIC will display AUTO UNLOCK OFF,
AUTO UNLOCK DRIVER, or AUTO UNLOCK BOTH.
Press the OPTIONS button to change the setting.
Park Assist
This feature tilts the passenger’s side mirror downward
when the shifter is moved to REVERSE (R). This can
help you to see the curb while backing up. If you adjust
the mirror while in REVERSE (R), the new position
will be saved as the park assist position.
The DIC will display PARK ASSIST OFF or
PARK ASSIST ON.
3-79
Language
Trip Computer
This feature allows you to select the language the
DIC and Head-Up Display (HUD), uses to display
messages.
Oil Life Indicator
The DIC will display ENGLISH, FRENCH, GERMAN,
ITALIAN, JAPANESE, or SPANISH. Press the
OPTIONS button to change the setting.
This feature lets you know when to change the engine
oil. It is based on the engine oil temperatures and
your driving patterns.
If you become stuck in a language that you do not
understand, hold the OPTIONS and RESET buttons
for five seconds. The DIC will scroll through all
available languages for as long as the buttons are held.
Each language option will display in its own language.
For example, English will be displayed as ENGLISH,
Spanish as ESPANOL, etc. When the desired language
is available, release the buttons and the DIC will
set to this language.
To see the display, press the information button several
times until OIL LIFE appears. If you see 99% OIL
LIFE, 99 percent of your current oil life remains.
3-80
The DIC may display a CHANGE OIL NOW message.
If you see CHANGE OIL NOW, it means the oil life
is gone. For more information, see Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7-4 and Engine Oil on page 6-16.
When the oil is changed, you will need to reset the
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 6-20.
Always keep a written record of the mileage and date
when you changed your oil.
Audio System(s)
Your vehicle has the Navigation Audio System. Read the
following pages to familiarize yourself with its features.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
driving. See Defensive Driving on page 5-2. Here
are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction
while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio,
make sure that it can be added by checking with
your dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units. If sound
equipment can be added, it is very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been added.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can
be played even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-24
for more information.
3-81
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does
not operate. If the radio is removed from your vehicle,
the original VIN in the radio can be used to trace
the radio back to your vehicle.
On the outboard side, you may have:
1. SEEK, SRCE, Heated Steering Wheel and
Cruise Control Cancel.
2. SRCE, Heated Steering Wheel, Adaptive
Cruise Control Gap, and Cruise Control Cancel.
The right side controls are the same for all versions.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle has audio steering wheel controls,
they could differ depending on your vehicle’s options.
There are two versions.
Audio Controls
With Heated Steering
Wheel and Cruise
Control Cancel
3-82
Audio Controls
With Heated Steering
Wheel and Adaptive
Cruise and GAP
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering
wheel. See the following
descriptions of the controls
that can adjusted.
The radio scans stations only with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
yz (Previous/Next): Press the arrows to go to the
previous or the next radio station stored as a favorite.
When a CD is playing, press either arrow to go to
the previous or to the next track.
+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus volume
button to increase or to decrease the radio volume.
Right-Side Audio
Controls
© SEEK ¨: Press the SEEK arrows to go to the
previous or the next radio station while in AM, FM, or
XM™ (if equipped).
The radio seeks stations only with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
Press either SEEK arrow to go to the previous or the
next track while sourced to a CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped) and CD.
SCAN: To scan stations, press and hold this button for
a few seconds, the radio goes to a station, plays for
a few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
g (Mute/Voice Recognition):
Press and release this
button to silence the vehicle speakers only. The audio of
the wireless and wired headphones, if your vehicle has
these features, does not mute. Press and release this
button again, to turn the sound on.
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press and hold
this button for longer than one second to initiate voice
recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the Navigation
System manual for more information.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold this button
for longer than one second to interact with the OnStar®
system. If your vehicle also has the navigation system,
press and hold this button for longer than one second to
initiate voice recognition and say “OnStar” to enter
OnStar® mode. See the OnStar® System on page 2-41
OnStar® System
3-83
Radio Reception
FM Stereo
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug
the item from the accessory power outlet.
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals only
reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings
or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out.
AM
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or through tunnels could cause loss
of the XM™ signal for a period of time. The radio
may display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other.
For better radio reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur
when things like storms and power lines interfere with
radio reception. When this happens, try reducing
the treble on your radio.
3-84
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Care of Your CDs
Diversity Antenna System
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is
soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean,
soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed
with water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
The AM-FM antennas are located under the decklid
surface in the trunk compartment. The antennas
are hidden from view and are not accessible.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling
it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
Care of the CD Player
If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to your
vehicle, do not attach the antenna to the rear glass.
This would interfere with the convertible top retraction
operation and could cause damage to the
finished/painted surfaces.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
Your vehicle may have the XM™ Satellite Radio
antennas that are located in the outside rear view
mirrors. These antennas are hidden from view and
are not accessible.
Do not use CD lens cleaners for CD players because
the lens of the CD optics can become contaminated
by lubricants.
3-85
✍ NOTES
3-86
Section 4
Navigation System
Overview .........................................................4-2
Navigation System Overview ............................4-2
Getting Started ...............................................4-4
Features and Controls ....................................4-11
Using the Navigation System ..........................4-11
Setup Menu .................................................4-13
Plan Route ..................................................4-19
Edit Memory Point ........................................4-20
Edit Waypoint ...............................................4-24
Edit Avoid Point/Area ....................................4-26
Enter Destination ..........................................4-28
Route Preference ..........................................4-37
Maps ..........................................................4-39
Symbols ......................................................4-44
Keyless Access System .................................4-50
OnStar® System ...........................................4-50
Global Positioning System (GPS) ....................4-50
Vehicle Positioning ........................................4-51
Problems with Route Guidance .......................4-52
If the System Needs Service ..........................4-52
Ordering Map DVDs ......................................4-53
Database Coverage Explanations ....................4-53
Navigation Audio System ................................4-54
Six-Disc CD Changer ....................................4-67
CD/DVD Player ............................................4-70
Radio Personalization with Home and Away
Feature ....................................................4-75
Voice Recognition ..........................................4-76
4-1
Overview
Navigation System Overview
4-2
A. BAND Key. See “Finding a Station” under Navigation
Audio System on page 4-54.
B. CD Key. See Navigation Audio System on page 4-54
or CD/DVD Player on page 4-70.
C. DVD Key. See “Playing a DVD” under CD/DVD
Player on page 4-70.
D. TUNE/SEEK Key. See “Playing the Radio” under
Navigation Audio System on page 4-54.
E. Audio/Adjust Key. See “Main Audio Menu” under
Navigation Audio System on page 4-54.
F. Power-Volume Knob. See “Hard Keys” under
Using the Navigation System on page 4-11.
G. Navigation System Screen.
H. RPT (Repeat) Key. See “Hard Keys” under
Using the Navigation System on page 4-11.
I. MAP Key. See “Hard Keys” under Using the
Navigation System on page 4-11.
J. ROUTE Key. See “Hard Keys” under Using the
Navigation System on page 4-11.
K. MENU Key. See “Hard Keys” under Using the
Navigation System on page 4-11.
L. TILT Key. See “Hard Keys” under Using the
Navigation System on page 4-11.
4-3
Getting Started
Before you begin to operate the navigation system, read
this manual thoroughly to become familiar with it and
to understand how the system works.
Any route suggestions made by this navigation system
may never override local traffic regulations, your
own judgement, and/or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
Disregard route suggestions made by the navigation
system if such suggestions would; cause you to perform
a hazardous or illegal maneuver, place you in a
hazardous situation, or route you into an area you
consider unsafe.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
driving. See Defensive Driving on page 5-2 for
more information. Get familiar with your vehicle’s
navigation system so you can use it with less effort
and take full advantage of its features. Your navigation
system includes not only navigation, but also audio
functions. While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls: hard
keys on the faceplate and touch-sensitive screen
buttons.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio by presetting your favorite stations,
setting the tone, and adjusting the speakers. Then,
when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your
favorite stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls (if equipped).
• Set up the navigation features that can only be done
before you begin driving, such as entering an
address or a preset destination.
4-4
Entering a destination or alphanumeric text requires
many steps, so you can only perform these operations
when the vehicle is in PARK (P). You will notice
that touch-sensitive screen buttons leading to the
alphanumeric keyboard are dimmed out while driving.
Other functions may also be locked out while driving and
they too will appear grayed out on the screen — but
all functions are available when parked. Some functions
can be performed while driving, as long as you can
do so without diverting too much of your attention from
your driving.
{CAUTION:
Looking at the moving map on the navigation
screen frequently or for too long while driving
can cause a crash and you or others can be
injured or killed. Keep your eyes and mind on
the road and avoid looking too long or too
often at the moving map on the navigation
screen. Use the voice guidance directions
whenever possible.
{CAUTION:
The navigation system allows you to do the following:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
• Plan a route with provided turn-by-turn route
and map guidance with voice prompts. See
Plan Route on page 4-19 for more information.
• Select a destination using various methods and
choices.
• Receive broadcast announcements on traffic and
emergency alert communications.
4-5
You should always be alert and obey traffic and roadway
laws and instructions, regardless of the guidance from
the navigation system. The navigation system uses
street map information that does not include all traffic
restrictions or the latest road changes, it may suggest
using a road that is now closed for construction or a
turn that is prohibited by signs at the intersection.
The system uses limited information, you must always
evaluate whether following the system’s directions
is safe and legal for the current conditions.
When getting started you may set the navigation system
to your preference or delete information you may
have entered using various options. To do so, reference
the following topics:
• To adjust screen appearance, language, clock,
English/metric measurements, or other options,
see “Main Audio Menu” under Navigation Audio
System on page 4-54.
• To adjust voice guidance volume or other navigation
settings, see Setup Menu on page 4-13.
Deleting Personal Information
This navigation system can record and store
destinations. At times, such as when you are disposing
of your vehicle, you may want to delete these
destinations. Refer to the following sections to delete
the destination information that has been stored.
See “Deleting Single Memory Points”, “Deleting All
Memory Points”, “Preset Dests.” (Destinations), “Home”
and “Previous Dest.” (Destination) under Edit Memory
Point on page 4-20 for deleting stored destinations.
Storing Radio Station Presets
To set preset radio stations, do the following:
1. Press the PWR/VOL knob to turn the system on.
2. Press the audio source screen button (AM, FM1,
FM2, etc.) and select the desired band (AM, FM1,
FM2, XM1, or XM2 (if equipped), or WX (weather)
(if equipped)).
3. Use the TUNE/SEEK arrows to tune to the
desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six preset screen buttons,
at the bottom of the screen, until you hear a beep or
see the station displayed on the selected preset
button.
5. Repeat the steps for each preset.
See “Preset Station Menu” under Navigation Audio
System on page 4-54 for more information.
4-6
Setting the Time
To set the time, do the following:
1. Press the PWR/VOL knob to turn the system on.
e/ z (Audio/Adjust) hard key.
Press the 8 clock symbol screen button.
2. Press the
3.
4. Select the 12H or 24H screen button to display the
time in standard or military time.
5. Press and hold the HOUR and MIN. (minute) arrow
buttons to increase or to decrease the time.
6. Select the appropriate time zone screen button.
7. Select the Daylight Saving Time screen button,
if necessary.
The radio will use the GPS satellite to set the time.
The vehicle needs to be in an open area to receive the
signal. See “Clock Adjust Menu” under Navigation
Audio System on page 4-54 for more information.
Setting the Search Area, Entering an
Address and Point of Interest, Storing a
Home Destination, and Using Your
Home or Previous Destinations
Before entering an Address, Point of Interest, Home, or
Preset Destination, select the appropriate region that
contains the final destination. Your vehicle must
be stopped to perform this operation.
Setting the Search Area
To set the search area, do the following:
1. If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted,
skip to Step 5.
2. Press the PWR/VOL knob to turn the system on.
3. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Regional Maps”
under Maps on page 4-39 for more information.
4. A notice may appear. Touch the I AGREE screen
button to proceed.
5. Press the ROUTE hard key.
6. Press the Enter Destination screen button.
7. Press the Change screen button.
8. Select the appropriate region numbered screen
button that contains your final destination.
The system will return to the Destination menu. See
Enter Destination on page 4-28 for more information.
4-7
Entering an Address
To set a destination by entering a street address, do the
following:
1. If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted,
skip to Step 5.
2. Press the PWR/VOL knob to turn the system on.
3. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Regional Maps”
under Maps on page 4-39 for more information.
4. A notice may appear. Touch the I AGREE screen
button to proceed.
5. Press the ROUTE hard key.
6. Press the Enter Destination screen button.
Verify that the selected Search Area is correct.
7. Press the Address screen button.
8. Press the Street screen button, then enter the street
name using the alpha keypad on the screen.
Do not enter directional information or street type,
and use the space screen button between street or
city names. For example, the street name N. Royal
Oak Rd. should be entered as royal oak. Use the
backspace ( V ) screen button if an incorrect
character has been entered.
9. Select the desired street name with the correct
designation (Dr., Ln., St., etc.) from the list.
10. If there is more than one city, the system will
display the list of cities that have that street
name. Select a city from the list or select the
City screen button to input the city name.
11. Enter the house number using the numeric keypad
on the screen and touch the Enter screen button.
The system will list the house number range that is
available for the street.
12. Press the Enter screen button to plan your route.
See “Address” under Enter Destination on page 4-28 for
more information.
4-8
Entering a Point of Interest (POI)
Storing a Home Destination
To set a destination by entering a Point of Interest (POI),
do the following:
1. If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted,
skip to Step 5.
1. If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted,
skip to Step 5.
2. Press the power/volume knob to turn the system on.
2. Press the power/volume knob to turn the system on.
3. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Regional Maps”
under Maps on page 4-39 for more information.
3. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Regional Maps”
under Maps on page 4-39 for more information.
4. A notice may appear. Touch the I AGREE screen
button to proceed.
4. A notice may appear. Touch the I AGREE screen
button to proceed.
5. Press the ROUTE hard key.
5. Press the ROUTE hard key.
7. Press the Home screen button.
6. Press the Enter Destination screen button.
Verify that the selected Search Area is correct.
8. Press the Register screen button.
Select a method for entering a destination.
See Enter Destination on page 4-28 for more
information.
7. Press the All Points of Interest screen button.
8. Enter the specific title of the POI in the Name space
(i.e. Washington Monument) using the alpha
keypad on the screen.
9. Select the POI from the list.
10. Press the Enter screen button to plan your route.
Using the Category or City selections will aid the
system in finding your POI by limiting the search
options.
6. Press the Edit Memory Point screen button.
9. Press the Enter screen button to store the Home
destination.
The L Home icon will be highlighted on the
DESTINATION screen. See “Using Your Home or
Previous Destinations” next to use the home or
previous destinations as a route.
See “All Points of Interest” under Enter Destination on
page 4-28 for more information.
4-9
Using Your Home or Previous
Destinations
These destinations are available for selection while
driving.
Canceling Your Current Route
Guidance will be canceled once you arrive at your final
destination. To cancel the current route prior to
arrival at the final destination, do the following:
1. If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted,
skip to Step 5.
1. Press the ROUTE hard key.
2. Press the power/volume knob to turn the system on.
3. Press the Cancel Route screen button.
3. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Regional Maps”
under Maps on page 4-39 for more information.
4. Press the Yes screen button to confirm cancellation.
4. A notice may appear. Touch the I AGREE screen
button to proceed.
5. Press the ROUTE hard key.
6. Press the Enter Destination screen button.
Verify that the selected Search Area is correct.
7. Select the L(Home symbol) or the Previous
Destination screen button.
If the Previous Destination screen button is selected,
a list of the last 10 previous destinations will
appear. Select the screen button next to the desired
destination.
8. Press the Enter screen button to plan your route.
See “Home” and “Previous Destination” under Enter
Destination on page 4-28 for more information.
4-10
2. Press the Route Preference screen button.
Guidance Volume
To adjust the volume of voice guidance prompts, do the
following:
1. Press the MENU hard key.
2. Press the ON screen button to turn voice volume on.
3. Select the desired volume or select the OFF screen
button. The system will play back the new volume
level.
See “Voice Guidance Volume Settings” under Setup
Menu on page 4-13 for more information.
Features and Controls
Using the Navigation System
This section presents basic information you will need to
know to operate the navigation system.
CD: Press the CD key to play a CD. The CD screen
will be displayed. See Six-Disc CD Changer on
page 4-67 or CD/DVD Player on page 4-70.
DVD: Press the DVD key to play a DVD. The DVD
screen will be displayed. See CD/DVD Player on
page 4-70.
Use the keys located on each side of the navigation
screen, as well as the available touch-sensitive screen
buttons, to operate the system. See Navigation
System Overview on page 4-2 for more information on
location.
y TUNE/SEEK z: Press the TUNE/SEEK up or
down arrows to go to the next or previous radio station
and stay there. See “Finding a Station” under
Navigation Audio System on page 4-54.
Once the vehicle is moving, various functions will be
disabled to reduce driver distraction.
e/ z:
Hard Keys
The following hard keys are located to the left of the
navigation screen:
BAND: Press the BAND key to access the band screen
and switch between AM, FM1, FM2, XM1, XM2, and
WX, if equipped. See “Finding a Station” under
Navigation Audio System on page 4-54.
Press the audio/adjust key to view the main
audio menu. See “Main Audio Menu” under Navigation
Audio System on page 4-54.
PWR-VOL (Power/Volume Knob): Press the
power/volume knob to turn the audio and navigation
systems on and off. Turn the knob to increase or
decrease the volume to the audio system.
The following hard keys are located to the right of the
navigation screen:
RPT: Press the repeat key to repeat the current voice
guidance navigation prompt.
4-11
MAP: Press the MAP key to view the map screen
showing current vehicle position.
The map screen can also display the following
information:
• North or Heading Up symbol. See Symbols on
page 4-44.
• Map scale. See Maps on page 4-39.
• Distance to destination.
• GPS symbol if GPS signal is not being received.
See Global Positioning System (GPS) on page 4-50.
• Options you have selected for reaching your current
destination.
• Driver Information.
• Radio band and presets.
ROUTE: Press the ROUTE key to display the PLAN
ROUTE menu. See Plan Route on page 4-19.
MENU: Press the MENU key to display the SETUP
MENU. See Setup Menu on page 4-13.
TILT X: Press the TILT key to open the navigation
system faceplate for loading or removing the map DVD,
a video DVD, or an audio CD. This key can only be
used while the vehicle is in PARK (P).
4-12
Alpha-Numeric Keypad
Letters of the alphabet, symbols, punctuation, and
numbers, when available to you, will be displayed on
the navigation screen as an alpha or numeric keypad.
The alpha keypad will be displayed when the system
needs you to input a city or street name. You can also
touch Char at the bottom of the alpha keypad to
access the numeric keypad when inputting a house
address, punctuation mark, or other character.
Touch A - Z to return to the alpha keypad.
All characters are touch-sensitive screen buttons.
Touch a character to select it.
Select the space symbol to enter a space between
characters or the words of a name.
V:
Select the backspace symbol if you have selected
an incorrect character.
To make your name selections easier, the system will
only allow you to select a character which can follow the
last one entered. For example, if you enter Z, you
would not be allowed to follow it with T. The system will
highlight the available characters and darken the
unavailable characters.
If you are unsuccessful when inputting a name, it may
need to be selected differently. It is also possible that the
map DVD database may not contain that information
or the correct search area has not been selected.
See Database Coverage Explanations on page 4-53
for more information.
Setup Menu
MENU: Press the MENU key located to the right of the
navigation screen to access the SETUP MENU.
Touch Sensitive Buttons
Touch-sensitive buttons are located on the screen.
When you have successfully selected a screen button,
a beep will be heard. These buttons will be highlighted
when a feature is available and dim when they are
unavailable. There are some toggle screen buttons that
will be light blue when active and dark blue when
inactive.
The SETUP MENU allows you to adjust such things
as map appearance, navigation settings, and voice
guidance volume.
4-13
Navigation Settings
System Configuration
This menu allows you to change the following options
for the navigation system.
This feature allows you to reconfigure the navigation
system. If you begin to drive your vehicle during
this procedure, the system will not be able to adjust the
position or direction of your vehicle.
Touch the System Configuration screen button to view
the following choices:
Adjust Vehicle Position: To correct the position of
your vehicle on the map or to change vehicle position,
do the following:
1. Touch the Adjust Vehicle Position screen button.
The system will display Position Adjustment.
The vehicle location symbol and the scroll symbol
will appear on the map.
2. Use the scroll symbol and the zoom in/zoom out
feature to locate the vehicle position on the map.
Restore Default Settings
This feature will automatically reset the system to the
default values.
To restore the default settings, do the following:
1. Touch the Restore Default Settings screen button.
2. Touch Enter.
3. Touch Return to exit this menu.
4-14
3. Touch Enter to set the vehicle position. The system
will display Position Adjustment and two arrows will
appear on the map screen.
4. Touch the arrows to adjust the direction of the
vehicle. As you touch the arrows, you will see
the vehicle symbol direction changing.
5. When you have set the vehicle to the correct
direction, touch Enter. Relocation Complete
will be displayed.
6. Touch Return to exit this menu.
Calibrate Vehicle Speed Signal: If there are tire
pressure differences or if a spare tire is installed, the
navigation system will automatically recalibrate the
system. You may also choose to calibrate it yourself by
doing the following:
Quick POI (Point of Interest) Selection
This menu allows you to choose a point of interest
(POI), such as gas stations, restaurants, hotels, etc. to
be displayed on the map screen. You can also set a
destination to a specific POI.
1. Touch Start to begin calibration.
2. Touch Return to exit this menu.
Time to Destination
This feature allows you to view the estimated time to
travel from your current position to the destination, and
to reset the average speed to factory default settings.
Estimated travel time is based on calculated route
information and the vehicle’s average speed. Touch ON
to turn this feature on, OFF to turn this feature off, or
Reset to restore vehicle speed default settings. With this
feature on, the estimated travel time to destination will
display along with the distance to destination.
Setting the Quick POI Menu
To set the Quick POI list displayed on the map screen,
do the following:
1. Select the category you would like to replace.
2. Select a Quick POI category from the Quick POI
selection menu list. The system will return to the
Quick POI selection screen when a POI is selected.
3. Touch Return to save the setting and return
to previous menu.
4-15
Displaying Quick POI Icons
Setting a Destination Using Quick POI
To display POI icons of a category on the map screen,
do the following:
This feature will allow you to choose a POI as your
destination. To set a destination using a POI, do the
following:
1. Touch the map screen once.
2. Touch the POI button. The Quick POI Selection list
will be displayed.
3. Select a category type or touch List Categories Or
All Local POIs to display the icons of the selected
category on the map screen.
Removing Quick POI Icons
To remove POI icons from the map screen, do the
following:
1. Touch the map screen once.
2. Touch the POI OFF screen button. The current POI
icons will be removed from the map screen.
1. Touch the POI icon on the map screen that you
wish to set as a destination.
The selected icon will be surrounded by a blinking
box, and the name of the icon will be displayed.
You may also touch INFO to view the POI name,
address, city, and phone number, if available.
2. Touch the ENT DEST screen button.
If a final destination has already been entered, you
can add the POI as a waypoint. See Edit Waypoint
on page 4-24 for more information.
3. Touch Enter to start planning your route.
4. To start route guidance, touch Start or begin driving
the vehicle. Route guidance will automatically begin
after a short distance.
If you wish to cancel the route you have just set, do the
following:
1. Press the ROUTE hard key.
2. Touch the Route Preference screen button.
3. Touch the Cancel Route screen button.
4. Select YES to cancel or NO to continue.
4-16
Guidance Appearance
This menu allows you to set the guidance appearance
screen options. This screen is displayed on the map
while on a planned route. The current settings will
appear as light blue.
Turn List: Select this feature to have the guidance
screen display several upcoming turns. Directional
arrows, street name, and distance to the next turn will
be displayed. As you approach the next turn, the system
will display a closer view of the upcoming maneuver.
Arrow: Select this feature to have the guidance screen
display the next turn. A directional arrow, street name,
and distance to the turn will be displayed. As you
approach the turn, the system will display a closer view
of the upcoming maneuver.
2D: Select this feature to display the guidance screen
as a two-dimensional view.
3D: Select this feature to display the guidance screen
as a three-dimensional view.
Split Map: Select this feature to display the guidance
screen on the map at all times.
Full Screen: Select this feature to display the guidance
screen on the map when approaching a maneuver.
4-17
Map Appearance
This menu allows you to set the map appearance screen
options. The current setting will appear as light blue.
Set 3D Viewing Angle: This feature allows you to
adjust the 3D viewing angle. To do so, do the following:
1. Touch 3D on the MAP APPEARANCE menu.
2. Touch Set 3D Viewing Angle.
The map screen with the 3D viewing angle bar will
be displayed.
3. Touch the up or down arrows to set the viewing angle.
4. Touch Return to save your settings and to exit this
menu or touch Reset to restore the viewing angle
to the default setting.
2D: Select this feature to display the map as a
two-dimensional view.
3D: Select this feature to display the map as a
three-dimensional view.
4-18
Voice Guidance Volume Settings
Plan Route
This feature allows you to set the voice prompt volume
level or to turn voice prompts on or off.
To plan a route, press the ROUTE key. The PLAN
ROUTE menu will be displayed.
Set the voice prompt volume level by touching the
numbered buttons to increase or decrease the volume
level. You may also choose to turn the voice prompts off.
Then touch Return to save your setting and to return
to the SETUP MENU.
If a voice prompt is active while the audio system is on,
the audio system volume will decrease and the voice
prompt will be heard through the driver’s side front
speaker.
Voice prompts will not be heard while using voice
recognition.
You may use one of several destination entry methods
to plan a route. See Enter Destination on page 4-28
for more information.
4-19
Edit Memory Point
This feature allows you to store, delete, and edit
memory points. Touch the Edit Memory Point screen
button from the PLAN ROUTE menu to access the EDIT
MEMORY POINT screen.
A total of 60 locations can be stored. The last
10 destinations entered will be stored under Previous
Destination. In addition, one memory point can be stored
under the Home category.
If all 60 stored points are entered, the system will notify
you that there is no available storage left in memory
points. A memory point must be removed before storing
additional memory points.
Registering Memory Points
To store a memory point, do the following:
1. Select a category from the EDIT MEMORY
POINT menu.
2. Touch REGISTER.
3. Select a method for entering a destination. A map
will appear displaying the memory point’s location.
4. If available, touch INFO to view the address
information for the memory point.
You can store memory points in four different categories,
personal, business, entertainment, and marked point.
Memory points are stored when you select either START
or MARK when setting a destination on the map or
when you are storing destinations in memory.
4-20
5. Touch Enter to store the point.
Editing Memory Points
Name Editing of a Memory Point
This feature allows you to edit the contents stored in
memory. The following options are available:
To modify the name of a stored memory point, do the
following:
Icon Editing of a Memory Point
Each memory point is displayed with a default icon.
To edit an icon, do the following:
1. Select the category of the memory point.
2. Select the item you want to edit.
1. Select the category of the memory point.
3. Touch the NAME screen button and use the alpha
keypad to edit the name. Names may contain up to
15 alpha and/or numeric characters.
2. Select the item you want to edit.
4. Touch Return to go to the previous screen.
3. Touch the icon. The EDIT MEMORY POINT icon
screen will appear.
Moving Memory Points
4. Touch the icon you would like to use. The system will
then return to the EDIT MEMORY POINT menu.
To move a memory point from one category to another,
do the following:
5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
1. Select the category of the memory point.
You will see the new memory point icon on the map.
2. Select the memory point you want to edit.
When selecting an icon, you can choose from
18 different icons, three of which are sound icons.
The same icon may be used for other memory points
as well.
3. Touch CATEGORY. A list of categories will appear.
The current category for the item will be highlighted
and cannot be selected.
4. Touch the screen button for the category you want
the memory point placed in. A pop-up window will
appear displaying the change in category.
5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
4-21
Adjusting a Memory Point
Deleting Single Memory Points
To relocate a memory point’s location, do the following:
To delete a single memory point, do the following:
1. Select the category of the memory point.
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Select the memory point you want to edit.
2. Touch EDIT MEMORY POINT.
3. Touch POSITION. A map screen with the position
of this memory point will appear.
3. Select the category of the memory point.
4. Touch anywhere on the screen to activate the scroll
feature and relocate the memory point. See Maps
on page 4-39.
5. Select the memory point you want to delete.
A confirmation window will appear.
5. Touch Enter to save the memory point’s new
location.
6. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
Changing the Phone Number of a
Memory Point
To edit or add the phone number of a memory point,
do the following:
4. Touch DELETE.
6. Touch YES to delete the memory point or NO
to return to the previous menu.
7. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
Deleting All Memory Points
To delete all of the memory points in a category, do the
following:
1. Press the ROUTE key.
1. Select the category of the memory point.
2. Touch EDIT MEMORY POINT.
2. Select the memory point you want to edit.
3. Select the desired category.
3. Touch PHONE and use the numeric keypad to edit
or add the number.
4. Touch the DELETE ALL screen button.
A confirmation window will appear.
4. Touch the RETURN button to take you back to the
previous screen when you have finished.
5. Touch YES to delete the memory points or NO
to return to the previous menu.
6. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
4-22
Edit Category
Previous Destination Memory
To edit the name of a category, do the following:
Each time you select Start from the map screen, that
destination will be stored as a memory point under
PREVIOUS DESTINATION. This category will store
up to 10 destinations.
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Touch EDIT MEMORY POINT.
3. Select the category you want to edit.
4. Touch the EDIT CATEGORY screen button and
use the alpha keypad to edit the category name.
The name can consist of up to 15 alpha and/or
numeric characters.
5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
Marked Point
A marked point is a memory point which has been
stored by selecting the MARK screen button while
traveling on a planned route. You can also use the scroll
feature to plan a destination on the map after reaching
the destination, or by moving a memory point to a
marked point category. See “Editing Memory Points”
earlier in this section for more information.
When the Previous Destination category contains
more than 10 destinations, the system will remove the
oldest destination stored and add the most recent
one selected to the list.
If you do not want a previous destination to be lost,
you must move the destination into a memory
point category. See “Moving Memory Points” earlier
in this section for more information.
Home Memory
This memory point is stored by selecting Home from
the EDIT MEMORY POINT screen. See “Registering
Memory Points” earlier in this section and “Home”
under Enter Destination on page 4-28 for more
information.
4-23
Edit Waypoint
Adding a Waypoint
Waypoints are destinations you can set along the way
to your final destination. This feature allows you to
add, edit, and delete waypoints.
To add a waypoint to your route, do the following:
1. Touch Add Waypoint.
2. Enter a destination. See Enter Destination on
page 4-28.
A map will appear showing the location of the
waypoint.
3. Touch Enter to add your waypoint.
4. Touch the ADD screen button to insert the waypoint
in the desired order.
5. The system will display the ROUTE INFORMATION
screen. From this screen, several options are
available.
You may set up to five waypoints on the way to your
final destination.
To access the WAYPOINT menu, do the following:
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Touch Edit Waypoint.
4-24
Delete: Touch Delete to delete a waypoint or the final
destination. A confirmation window will appear.
Touch YES to delete the point or NO to return to the
previous screen.
Delete All: Touch Delete All to delete all of the
waypoints and the final destination. A confirmation
window will appear. Touch YES to delete all waypoints
or NO to return to the previous screen.
Change: Touch Change to change the final destination.
Enter a destination. See Enter Destination on
page 4-28.
List: Touch List to view the waypoint on the map or to
change the order of the waypoints and final destination.
To change the order, touch CHG ORDER, then touch
the blank screen button next to the destination to
select the order of the waypoints and final destination.
Press the MAP key to view the destination and
waypoints on the map screen.
Add: Touch Add to add additional waypoints. Refer to
the steps for adding a waypoint listed previously in
this section.
Calculate: Touch Calculate to begin route calculation.
This feature will only be available if the final destination
has been set.
4-25
Editing a Waypoint
Edit Avoid Point/Area
This feature allows you to edit waypoints that have
already been set. To edit a waypoint, do the following:
From this menu you can register, edit, and delete an
area to be avoided while planning a route. These areas
can also be saved so the system can automatically
avoid them when planning a route.
1. Touch Edit Waypoint.
2. Touch the MAP key to view the destination location
on the map screen.
3. Touch CHANGE ORDER to change the order of the
waypoints and the final destination.
You can also use the map scroll to change a
waypoint from one location to another.
Deleting a Waypoint
To delete a waypoint from your route, do the following:
1. Touch Delete Waypoint.
2. Select the waypoint you want to delete.
A confirmation window will appear.
3. Touch YES to delete the waypoint or NO to
return to the previous menu.
To access the AVOID POINT/AREA menu, do the
following:
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Touch Edit Avoid Point/Area.
4-26
Registering an Avoid Point/Area
Editing an Avoid Point/Area
To store an avoid point/area, do the following:
To edit an avoid point/area, do the following:
1. Touch Register Avoid Point/Area.
2. Enter a location. See Enter Destination on
page 4-28.
3. If desired, reduce or enlarge the area around the
point you want to avoid by using the REDUCE or
ENLARGE screen buttons.
If an avoid point cannot be avoided, the system will
display “Avoid Point and Area Stored. Route
May Not Avoid the Avoid Point and Areas.”
4. Touch Enter to set the area as an avoid point area.
When using the REDUCE or ENLARGE buttons, a
box will appear to represent the area or an X will
appear to represent the area avoided. When an
avoid point is set, the square will appear as green.
5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
1. Touch Edit Avoid Point/Area. A list of avoided
points will appear.
2. Select the avoided point/area you want to change.
A map of the avoided area will appear.
3. Use REDUCE or ENLARGE to edit the avoided
point.
4. Touch Enter to set your new avoided area.
The system will display “Area Adjusted.”
5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
Deleting an Avoid Point/Area
To delete an avoid point/area, do the following:
1. Touch Delete Avoid Point/Area. A list of avoided
points will appear.
2. Select the avoided point/area you want to delete.
3. The system will ask you to confirm your selection.
Touch Yes to delete the avoid point/area or No to
cancel.
If Yes is selected, the area will no longer be
avoided when traveling on a planned route.
4. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
4-27
Enter Destination
To enter a destination, choose from one of the
destination entry methods following in this section.
The DESTINATION menu will give you several ways to
plan a route. Touch the Enter Destination screen
button from the PLAN ROUTE menu to display the
DESTINATION menu.
After entering a destination, If available, the system
will display up to three routes in a pop-up window
indicating the total mileage and time to destination for
each route. Select a route by touching NEXT. The map
will display each route in a different color. The selected
route will be highlighted in red.
To start route guidance, touch Start or begin driving
your vehicle. Route guidance will automatically begin
after a short distance.
If you touch CHG ROUTE before touching Start, you will
be able to change route preferences. See Route
Preference on page 4-37 for more information.
When a route has been planned, it will be highlighted
and a bulls-eye symbol will appear on the map to show
your final destination.
If you wish to cancel a route that has been set, see
“Cancel Route” under Route Preference on page 4-37.
For destination entry methods listed on the second page
of the DESTINATION menu, touch the Next Page arrow.
Touch the Prev. Page arrow to return to the first page.
4-28
Easy Planning Route
With this destination entry method, you can select a
destination using the scroll symbol on the map screen.
See Maps on page 4-39.
3. Touch the map screen continuously to scroll
through the map faster. The address of the location
on the map will appear at the top of the screen.
If needed, use the zoom feature to locate your
destination. See “Map Scales” under Maps
on page 4-39 for more information.
4. Touch ENT DEST to set this location as your
destination. You may also touch MARK to store this
location as a memory point.
5. Touch Enter to plan your route.
To use this destination entry method, do the following:
1. Press the MAP key.
2. Touch the map screen twice for the scroll symbol to
appear. Touch the map or drag the scroll symbol
toward your destination.
4-29
Address
This destination entry method allows you to input an
address by providing the system with a house number,
street name, and city. Select Street to begin entering
the desired address.
Do not include name extensions such as N. or Drive.
For example, the street name N. Civic Center Drive
should be entered as Civic Center. As information is
entered, the system will automatically search for
available names, and List will become available.
2. Touch List to view name choices or continue to
spell the street name to further reduce the number
of available items. Select a street name.
3. If the street name you entered exists in more than
one city on the DVD database, a list of cities will
appear. You can select a city from the list, or enter
the city name by selecting City. As you begin to
enter the city name, you can select the desired city
from the list which will appear, or continue to
spell the city name to further reduce the number of
available items.
To use this destination entry method, do the following:
1. Enter the street name using the alpha keypad.
See “Alpha-Numeric Keypad” under Using the
Navigation System on page 4-11 for more
information.
4-30
4. Once the city name has been selected, enter the
house number using the numeric keypad.
The system will list the house number range that is
available for the street.
5. When you have finished entering all of the address
information, touch Enter to plan your route.
All Points of Interest
This destination entry method allows you to choose a
destination from the point of interest (POI) list. Selecting
All Points Of Interest from the DESTINATION menu will
bring up the alpha keypad. While inputting a POI or
city name, the List option will become available.
As information is entered, the system will search for
available POI and city names based on the information
given. The system will supply a list of names to make a
selection from when the choices are five or less.
You may search for a POI using the following three
methods:
• Touch NAME to type in a POI by name using the
alpha key pad. As you type in a name, the system
will search for an available match to your input.
Select the desired POI.
• Select a POI by touching CATEGORY. Use the
arrows to scroll through the categories listed.
Select a category along with any appropriate
sub-categories. If the list of available POIs for the
selected category is too long, you may need to enter
the POI’s name or city.
• Select CITY, then type in the city you wish to select a
POI from. Choose a city from the list of cities that will
appear. If the list of POIs for the selected city is too
long, enter the POI’s name or choose a category.
While inputting a POI or city name, the List option will
become available. Touch List to view the list of
name choices, or continue to spell the name to further
reduce the list of available items.
4-31
The system will list all POIs available. You can sort by
name using NAME SORT or touch DIST SORT to
list POIs by distance from your current location.
Select a location from the list. The system will show
the selected POI on the map. If available, a pop-up
window will be displayed. Touch INFO to view the POI’s
name, address, city, and phone number, if available.
Touch Enter to plan your route.
4-32
Memory Points
This destination entry method allows you to set a
memory point as your destination. Each time you store
a destination from the map screen, the destination
is stored under MARKED POINT. See Edit Memory
Point on page 4-20 for more information.
You must have destinations stored as memory
points to select from PERSONAL, BUSINESS,
ENTERTAINMENT, or MARKED POINT. If you have
renamed the memory point category name(s), the
name(s) will appear as you changed them.
To select a destination using this entry method, do the
following:
1. Touch the Memory Points symbol.
2. Select a category.
3. Select a destination. Use the arrows to scroll
through the memory points. They can be sorted by
date, name, distance, and icon.
4. Touch Enter to plan your route.
Previous Destination
This destination entry method allows you to select a
destination by choosing from a list of the last
10 destinations entered into the system.
To select a previous destination, do the following:
1. Touch the Previous Destination symbol.
2. Touch the screen button next to the desired
destination to select it.
Use the arrows if necessary to view the entire list of
previous destinations.
3. Touch Enter to plan your route.
Previous Starting Point
This destination entry method allows you to select the
last start point as your destination. To select the
previous start point as your destination, do the following:
1. Touch Previous Destination.
2. Touch the Previous starting point screen button.
3. Touch Enter to plan your route.
4-33
Home
Set by Map
This destination entry method allows you to select a
destination that has been previously stored as Home.
This destination entry method allows you to select a
destination by using the scroll symbol.
To choose Home as your destination, do the following:
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Touch the Home symbol.
2. Touch Enter to plan your route.
1. Touch the Set By Map symbol. Current vehicle
position will be shown on the map screen.
2. Use the scroll symbol to select the desired
destination. The zoom in and zoom out feature can
be used to assist you in finding the desired location.
See “Map Scales” under Maps on page 4-39.
3. Touch Enter to plan your route.
4-34
Freeway Entrance/Exit
This destination entry method allows you to select either
a freeway entrance or an exit as a destination.
3. Touch List to view the list of available name choices
or continue to spell the name to further reduce the list
of available items. The system will supply a list of
names when the choice is five or less.
If you are unsuccessful when inputting a name,
the name may need to be input differently, the map
DVD database may not contain this information,
or the name may be misspelled.
4. Select a freeway from the list.
To enter a freeway name, do the following:
1. Touch the Freeway Entrance/Exit symbol.
2. Enter the freeway name using the alpha key pad.
Freeways sometimes have a name and a number
associated with them which you may need to
refer to when entering freeway information.
Freeways are also referred to by their abbreviated
names. For example, Interstate 75 in the U.S.
is selected by entering I-75.
As you enter a freeway name, the List option will
become available.
5. The ENTRANCE or EXIT options will appear.
Choose ENTRANCE to select the entrance to
the freeway, or EXIT to select the exit ramp of the
freeway.
When either button is touched, it will give an
alphabetical list of freeway entrance and exit ramps
on the freeway you entered. You may touch
DIST SORT to sort the list by distance from your
current location, or NAME SORT to sort the
list by name.
6. Select the desired freeway entrance or exit from the
list. A map will appear with the destination shown.
7. Touch Enter to plan your route.
4-35
Intersection
This destination entry method allows you to select a
destination by inputting the intersecting roads you wish
to travel to.
3. To view a list of choices, touch List or continue to
spell the name to further reduce the list of available
items. The system will display a list of the
intersecting streets if the number of intersecting
streets is five or less.
4. Select the first street.
5. Now enter the second street name.
6. Select the second street name from the list of
intersecting streets. To view a list of choices,
touch List or continue to spell the name to further
reduce the list of available items. The system
will display a list of intersecting streets if the number
of intersecting streets is five or less.
If there are multiple intersections with the same
two roads, the system will display a list of cities to
choose from. Choose a city from this list. A map with
the intersections for that city will appear.
7. Touch Enter to plan your route.
To enter an intersection, do the following:
1. Touch the Intersection symbol.
2. Using the alpha keypad, enter the name of the first
street in the intersection.
4-36
Route Preference
The following options will be available from the ROUTE
PREFERENCE menu:
To change your planning options, use the following
instructions.
Detour
This feature allows you to choose a distance in
miles/kilometers to detour. Select the detour distance
desired for residential roads and freeways.
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Touch Route Preference.
The system will retain these settings for the next time
you use Detour, unless you change them.
You may also touch Alternate to provide a new route
that does not use previously stored detour settings.
Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
4-37
Route Setting
This feature allows you to display and change the
planning methods used each time you plan a route.
With planning method options, you are able to select the
fastest route based on time or distance, using only
major roads, toll roads, and using ferries based on the
navigation system’s information and information
contained on the map DVD.
Use Major Roads: Choose Yes to calculate the best
route using only major roads unless a route cannot
be found without the use of a secondary road.
This selection will not always offer the shortest distance
or time to your destination.
Use Toll Roads: Choose Yes to calculate the best route
using toll roads wherever possible. This selection will not
always offer the shortest distance or time to your
destination.
Use Ferries: Choose Yes to calculate the best route
using ferries when possible. This selection will not always
offer the shortest distance or time to your destination.
Display Whole Route
This feature allows you to display your entire planned
route. Total mileage and time to destination for the
planned route will be displayed on the map screen.
Touch Return to go back to the previous menu.
Calculate Route
This feature allows you to begin route calculation for the
selected destination.
The following options will be available from the ROUTE
SETTING menu:
Minimize Time/Distance: The system will calculate the
fastest route or shortest route possible. Choose Time
for the fastest route or Dist for the shortest route.
4-38
Cancel Route
If you are traveling on a planned route and would like to
cancel it, touch Cancel Route. The system will ask
you to confirm by touching YES. Touch YES to confirm
cancellation of your planned route or touch Return to
keep your planned route.
Maps
This section includes basic information you need to
know about the map database.
The maps are stored on a DVD-ROM. The 48 contiguous
United States and portions of Canada are contained on
two discs. To minimize the necessity of changing the
discs, both map discs cover US6, US7, and Canada.
East
West
4-39
Detailed Areas
Installing the DVD Map Disc
Road network attributes are contained in the map
database for detailed areas. Attributes include
information such as street names, street address, turn
restrictions, etc. A detailed area will include all major
highways, service roads, and residential roads.
The detailed areas include points of interest (POI)
such as: restaurants, airports, banks, hospitals, police
stations, gas stations, tourist attractions, historical
monuments, etc. The map database may not include
data for newly constructed areas or map database
corrections that are completed after the production of
the disc. The navigation system will provide full route
guidance in the detailed map areas.
Your dealer/retailer may have installed the map DVD.
If the map DVD was not installed, do the following
to load it:
Limited Guidance Areas
Any area that is not classified as detailed is a limited
guidance area. Limited guidance streets will be
displayed on the map display but route guidance may
not be given on these streets. Some POI categories,
such as the city center POI category, and some street
addresses are included in the limited guidance areas.
The navigation system will inform you by voice prompts
when you are traveling into a limited guidance area
where route guidance will not be available. The street
maps and the directional arrow displayed on the
navigation system can then be used to determine the
remaining route to your destination.
4-40
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. With the vehicle in PARK (P), press and hold the
TILT key until a beep is heard. The system’s
faceplate will open.
3. If already loaded, the map DVD or a CD will eject
from the slot.
4. Load the map DVD into the slot by inserting it
partway. The system will pull it in.
5. Press and release the TILT key to close the
faceplate.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) with the system’s
faceplate open will cause the faceplate to close
automatically. This could cause damage to a
CD, DVD or the system if it is partially loaded. Before
shifting out of PARK (P), make sure that the DVD
or CD is loaded properly. The vehicle must be
shifted back into PARK (P) to close the faceplate.
Once the map DVD is inserted correctly, you will have
the following two choices:
• LANGUAGE
• I AGREE
You can change the language at this time.
See “Language” under Navigation Audio System on
page 4-54 for more information on choosing a language.
Once a language has been selected, touch I AGREE
to plan a route. The map will appear showing your
current vehicle position.
DVD Map Disc Messages
If an error appears on the display and/or the map disc
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
• If the map disc was installed into the CD slot.
See “Installing the DVD Map Disc” previously.
• It is very hot, when the temperature returns to
normal, the map disc should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When
the road becomes smoother, the map disc
should play.
• The map disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
Ejecting the DVD Map Disc
When the DVD map disc is not loaded, you will not be
able to use the navigation portion of the system.
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. With the vehicle in PARK (P), press and hold the
TILT key until a beep is heard. The system’s
faceplate will open.
3. The map DVD will eject from the slot. Pull the
disc out.
4. Press and release the TILT key to close the
faceplate.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) with the system’s
faceplate open will cause the faceplate to close
automatically. This could cause damage to a
CD, DVD or the system if it is partially loaded. Before
shifting out of PARK (P), make sure that the DVD
or CD is loaded properly. The vehicle must be
shifted back into PARK (P) to close the faceplate.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
4-41
Handling the DVD Map Disc
Setting the Search Area
When handling the DVD map disc, be careful of the
following:
To determine or change the system’s search area,
do the following:
• Handle the disc very carefully to avoid
contamination or flaws. Signals may not read out
properly if the disc gets contaminated or flawed.
• If the disc gets soiled, use a soft cloth to gently wipe
it out from the center of the disc to the outside.
Do not use photographic record cleaner, solvents,
or other cleaners.
• Do not use the disc to rest on while writing or
drawing using any writing utensil or attach a seal
to any of the sides or the disc.
• Do not keep the disc in direct sunlight, high
temperatures, or humidity.
• After using the disc, place it back into the
original case.
4-42
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Touch the Enter Destination screen button.
3. Touch Change under
the Search Area
heading. The system
will display a map
with each region
represented.
Map Adjustments
The system allows you to adjust the scale of view on
the map. The map will scroll automatically based on the
direction you are traveling.
Map Scales
To view a larger or smaller
scale of the map, touch
the map scale arrows.
4. Select the desired region by touching the
appropriate screen button to the left of the
U.S. map. The name of the states or the country
included in the selected region will be displayed
at the bottom of the screen and the region will be
highlighted.
5. Touch Enter to set the region as the search area.
6. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
You may also adjust the scale of the map by touching
the scale on the bar. The scale of a map can range from
1/32 of a mile (0.05 km) to 128 miles (256 km).
4-43
Scrolling the Map
Symbols
Touch anywhere on the
map screen twice to
display the scroll symbol.
The following symbols are the most common that
appear on a map screen.
Your vehicle is shown as
this symbol. It indicates
the current position
and heading direction of
your vehicle on the map.
Place your finger on the map screen in any direction
outside of the scroll symbol to scroll in that direction.
The map will continue to scroll until you remove
your finger.
If your vehicle is in PARK (P), the system will initially
scroll at a slower rate. The rate will increase if you
continue to touch the map screen.
This symbol will appear on
the map to show your
destination after a route
has been planned.
If your vehicle is in motion, there is one scroll speed
and a limited distance to scroll. You must keep touching
the map screen to scroll a longer distance.
If your vehicle icon becomes lost while scrolling, press
the MAP key to show the vehicle’s current location.
You may also use the scroll feature to set a destination.
See “Set by Map” under Enter Destination on page 4-28.
4-44
See Enter Destination on page 4-28 for more information
on planning a route.
You will see this type of
symbol on the map when a
waypoint has been
planned.
This symbol indicates the
distance and estimated
travel time to your final
destination. The Estimated
Travel Time feature
must be on for estimated
travel time to be displayed.
The waypoint symbol will be numbered from 1 through 5
depending on how many waypoints have been set.
See Edit Waypoint on page 4-24 for more information
on adding waypoints.
This symbol indicates the
distance to your final
destination.
This symbol indicates
the distance to your
final destination in a
straight line.
This symbol will appear before route guidance begins
or if you are on a road where route guidance is not
available.
4-45
This symbol indicates the
map with North up.
While in North up mode, North will always be at the top
of the map screen regardless of which direction the
vehicle is traveling.
This symbol indicates
the map with the vehicle
travel direction up, or
Heading up.
The shaded triangle indicates North. While in Heading
up mode, the direction your vehicle is traveling will
always be at the top of the map screen.
Touch either the North Up heading symbol or the
vehicle Heading Up symbol to alternate between
settings.
4-46
This symbol will appear
when the navigation
system is unable to
receive the GPS signal.
See Global Positioning System (GPS) on page 4-50 for
more information.
When a point of interest
(POI) or street address
name is too long to
be displayed, an arrow
will appear.
Touch the right or left arrow to scroll through the
entire name.
This symbol indicates the
position of the next turn
instruction.
With these options, you can do the following:
While on a planned route,
touch this symbol to
display the DEST MAP,
WHOLE, and TURN LIST
options.
Dest (Destination) Map: This option allows you to view
the final destination location. The destination’s name
or address will be displayed on the map screen.
Touch Return when finished.
4-47
Whole: This option allows you to view the entire planned
route. The distance to destination will be displayed on the
map screen. Touch Return when finished.
Turn List: This option allows you to view a step-by-step
listing of upcoming street names, the distance that
you will travel on the road, and turns you will need to
make during your planned route.
After touching Turn List, the system may take some
time to create the list. The length of time will vary
depending on the length of your route and the planning
methods you have selected.
The turn list will read from bottom to top. The bottom
street name is the street you are currently on.
The system automatically updates this screen as you
make each turn. You may also touch the scroll up
and down arrows providing scroll is available. Touching
the down arrow will bring you to your current location.
4-48
Touching the up arrow will give you upcoming streets.
At times, there may not be names available for entrance
or exit ramps.
To avoid a turn, touch AVOID next to the turn you want
to avoid. You can use REDUCE or ENLARGE to edit
the avoided point. Touch Reroute or press the MAP key
to calculate your new route.
Touch Return to view your current position and to turn
the turn list screen off.
Touch REROUTE or press the MAP key to calculate a
new route.
Auto Reroute
When your destination is set and you travel off of the
planned route, the system will automatically begin
to reroute you. You will see the new route highlighted
on the screen.
Traveling Across Regions
If you plan to drive across several states, you may have
to change the selected region to represent the area
you are traveling to.
There are two ways you can plan a destination when
traveling across regions.
The following method is suggested and provides the
most route guidance and map display functions:
1. Change the selected search area region when
you get closer to the area you are traveling to.
See “Setting the Search Area” under Maps on
page 4-39.
2. Enter your destination and route settings.
See Enter Destination on page 4-28 for more
information.
If you do not want to use the first method, keep your
currently selected search area region and enter your
destination. This method allows you only to select a
destination from the easy planning route method or
from the All Points of Interest (POI) categories with the
“All Search Areas” comment for US Only. For example,
Tourist is a category that features this comment. See
Enter Destination on page 4-28 for more information.
If you are traveling in or to Canada and you cross the
regional border, the only map scale views available
are 4 mi, 8 mi, 31 mi, and 128 mi (8 km, 16 km, 64 km
and 256 km). Change the selected search area region
when you get closer to the area you are traveling to.
See “Setting the Search Area” under Maps on page 4-39
for more information.
4-49
Keyless Access System
When the engine is started, Driver 1 or Driver 2 will
display on the screen. A message will not appear on the
screen if the driver is unknown. The number on the
back of the transmitter corresponds to driver 1 or
driver 2. The navigation system can store memory points
for drivers 1 and 2 individually. See Keyless Access
System on page 2-5 for more information.
OnStar® System
When using the OnStar® system, the audio system will
be muted and the navigation voice prompts will be
disabled during the call. The volume of the OnStar® call
can be adjusted by using the steering wheel volume
controls. See OnStar® System on page 2-41 for
more information.
Global Positioning System (GPS)
The navigation system determines the position of your
vehicle by using satellite signals, various vehicle signals,
and map data.
At times, other interferences such as the satellite
condition, road configuration, the condition of the vehicle
and/or other circumstances can interfere with the
navigation system’s ability to determine the accurate
position of the vehicle.
4-50
The GPS shows the current position of your vehicle using
signals sent by the GPS Satellites of the United States
Department of Defense. When your vehicle is not
receiving signals from the satellites, a symbol will appear
on the map screen. Refer to Symbols on page 4-44.
This system may not be available or interferences may
occur if any of the following are true:
• Signals are obstructed by tall buildings, trees, large
trucks, or a tunnel.
• Objects are located on the rear shelf.
• Satellites are being repaired or improved.
• After-market glass tinting has been applied to the
vehicle’s rear windshield.
Notice: Do not apply after-market glass tinting to
the vehicle’s windows. Glass tinting will interfere
with the system’s ability to receive GPS signals and
cause the system to malfunction. You might have
to replace the window to correct the problem.
This would not be covered by your warranty.
For more information if you are experiencing a problem,
see If the System Needs Service on page 4-52 and
Problems with Route Guidance on page 4-52.
Vehicle Positioning
• The vehicle is entering and/or exiting a parking lot,
garage, or a lot with a roof.
At times, the position of the vehicle on the map may be
inaccurate due to one or more of the following reasons:
• The road system has changed.
• The vehicle is driving on slippery road surfaces such
as in sand, gravel, and/or snow.
• The vehicle is traveling on winding roads.
• The vehicle is on a long straight road.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall building or a large
vehicle.
• The surface streets run parallel to a freeway.
• The vehicle has just been transferred by a vehicle
carrier or a ferry.
• The current position calibration is set incorrectly.
• The vehicle is traveling at high speed.
• The vehicle changes directions more than once, or
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The GPS signal is not received.
A roof carrier is installed on your vehicle.
The vehicle is being driven with tire chains.
The tires are replaced.
The tire pressure for your tires is incorrect.
The tires are worn.
The first time the map DVD is inserted.
The battery is disconnected for several days.
The vehicle is driving in heavy traffic where driving is
at low speeds, and the vehicle is stopped and started
repeatedly.
If you experience problems with your system, see
“Adjust Vehicle Position” under Setup Menu on
page 4-13 to calibrate the system.
when the vehicle is turning on a turn table in a
parking lot.
4-51
Problems with Route Guidance
Inappropriate route guidance may occur under one or
more of the following conditions:
• You have not turned onto the road indicated.
• Route guidance may not be available when using
automatic rerouting for the next right or left turn.
• The route may not be changed when using
automatic rerouting.
• There is no route guidance when turning at an
intersection.
• Plural names of places may be announced
occasionally.
• It may take a long time to operate automatic
rerouting during high-speed driving.
• Automatic rerouting may display a route returning to
the set waypoint if you are heading for a destination
without passing through a set waypoint.
4-52
• The route prohibits the entry of a vehicle due to a
regulation by time or season or any other regulation
which may be given.
• Some routes may not be searched.
• The route to the destination may not be shown if
there are new roads, if roads have recently
changed, or if certain roads are not listed on the
map DVD. See Ordering Map DVDs on page 4-53.
To recalibrate the vehicle’s position on the map, see
“Adjust Vehicle Position” under Setup Menu on
page 4-13 to calibrate the system.
If the System Needs Service
If your system needs service and you have followed the
steps listed here and still are experiencing problems,
see your dealer/retailer for assistance.
Ordering Map DVDs
The map DVD in your vehicle is the most up-to-date
information available when your vehicle was produced.
The map DVD is updated periodically, provided that
the map information has changed.
If you have any questions about the operation of the
navigation system or the update process, contact
the GM Nav Disc Center toll-free phone number,
1-877-NAV-DISC (1-877-628-3472) or go to the
center’s website, www.gmnavdisc.com. If you need any
updates or a replacement disc, because the current
disc is lost, damaged, or needs to be updated, call the
GM Nav Disc Center or order a new disc online.
To order a disc, have your Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) available. This helps the center make
sure you receive the correct and most up-to-date DVD
map disc for your vehicle. See Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) on page 6-89 for more information.
After receiving the updated disc, replace the old disc in
the navigation system. See “Installing the DVD Map
Disc” and “Ejecting the DVD Map Disc” under Maps on
page 4-39. Dispose of the old disc to avoid confusion
about which disc is the most current.
Database Coverage Explanations
Coverage areas vary with respect to the level of map
detail available for any given area. Some areas will
feature greater levels of detail than others. If this
happens, it does not mean there is a problem with the
system. As the map DVD is updated, more detail
may become available for areas which previously had
limited detail. See Ordering Map DVDs on page 4-53.
4-53
Navigation Audio System
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound
equipment can be added, it is very important to do
it properly. Added sound equipment can interfere
with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio,
or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems can interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been added.
Main Audio Menu
e/ z (Audio/Adjust):
Press this key to view the main
audio screen.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-24 for more
information.
The audio system is operated using navigation system
menus. The audio menus are explained in this section.
Preset Selection: Here you can program the audio
system’s presets to recall your home settings by
touching HOME. You can also recall the presets you
use when traveling to another area by touching AWAY.
See “Preset Station Menu” later in this section for
more information on how to store preset stations.
The Home and Away feature is not available for the
XM™ Satellite Radio source, if equipped.
4-54
Display Presets on the Map: With this feature on,
your audio system presets for the current audio source
will be displayed on the left of the map screen.
Touch ON to turn this feature on. You may also choose
to turn this feature off.
With this feature on, you can recall your preset radio
stations from the map screen. You cannot store preset
stations from the map screen. You must do this from
the audio screen. See “Preset Station Menu” later in this
section for more information on storing presets.
Automatic Volume Control (AVC): The system has
Bose AudioPilot® noise compensation technology.
AudioPilot® continuously adjusts the audio system
equalization, to compensate for background noise, so
that your music always sounds the same at the set
volume level.
8 (Clock):
Touch this screen button to get to the
CLOCK ADJUST menu. See “Clock Adjust Menu” later
in this section for more information.
SCREEN ADJUST: To adjust the brightness or contrast
of the screen, touch SCREEN ADJUST to display the
screen adjust menu. See “Screen Adjust Menu” later in
this section for more information.
SOUND: Touch this screen button to access the
Sound menu. See “Sound Menu” later in this section for
more information.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing): Touch this screen
button to access the DSP menu. See “Adjusting
the Speakers” later in this section for more information.
To use AudioPilot®, press the ON screen button.
To turn it off, press the OFF screen button.
This feature is most effective at lower volume settings
where background noise can affect how well you hear the
music being played through your vehicle’s audio system.
At higher volume settings, where the music is much
louder than the background noise, there may be little or
no adjustments by AudioPilot®. For more information on
AudioPilot®, visit www.bose.com/audiopilot.
4-55
Clock Adjust Menu
GPS TIME: The current GPS time will be displayed to
the right of this screen button. Touch GPS TIME to
set the navigation system time to match current GPS
time. If the seconds for the present minute are greater
than thirty when GPS TIME is selected, the clock
will round up to the next minute.
Daylight Saving Time: Touch this screen button to
increase the time setting by one hour. Then touch GPS
TIME to save the new setting. If the screen button is
light blue, the daylight savings time feature is on. If the
button is dark blue, the daylight savings time feature
is off.
The following options are available from this menu:
HOUR/MIN.: Touch the up or down arrows to increase or
decrease the hour or minutes. If you touch and hold one
of the arrows, the numbers will advance quickly.
12H/24H: Touch 12H to set the clock in standard time
or 24H to set the clock in military time.
TIME ZONE: The selected time zone will appear to the
right of this screen button. Touch this screen button
to toggle between time zones and select the desired
one. The time of the selected zone will be displayed to
the right of the GPS TIME screen button. To set the
clock to the new setting, touch GPS TIME.
If the system is not receiving GPS information, you can
still set the time manually as described above but the
GPS time and Daylight Saving Time features will not be
available.
Touch Return to go back to the previous menu.
4-56
Screen Adjust Menu
! (Brightness):
Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) signs
to adjust the brightness of the screen.
You will see the screen change. Touch SET to confirm
the setting.
AUTO: This setting automatically adjusts the contrast
and brightness of the screen depending on exterior
lighting conditions.
DAY: This setting leaves the screen in day mode.
Day mode is best suited for daylight conditions.
NIGHT: This setting leaves the screen in night mode.
Night mode is best suited for nighttime conditions.
The following options are available from this menu:
K (Contrast):
Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) signs to
adjust the contrast of the screen.
SCREEN OFF: Touch SCREEN OFF to turn off the
screen. Press any hard key to turn the screen back on.
SET: Touch SET to save your choices and exit the
CLOCK ADJUST menu.
You will see the screen change. Touch SET to confirm
the setting.
4-57
Language
Finding a Station
Your vehicle has been set for the English language.
If you wish to change the language, you must do
so through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-60
for more information.
If the language is changed from English, a majority of the
voice guidance prompts and screen text will change to
the selected language. Remember, the menu screens will
not match word-for-word as they appear in this manual.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL (Power-Volume): Press this knob to turn
the audio and navigation systems on and off. Turn the
knob to increase or decrease the volume to the
audio system.
«TUNE/SEEK ª:
Press the up or down arrow to go
to the next or previous station and stay there.
BAND: Press this key to switch between AM, FM1,
FM2, XM1, XM 2, or WX, if equipped. If you are on a
map screen and press this key, the screen will not
change but the audio source will.
4-58
FM1 audio source shown, other sources similar
Press the BAND key to switch between AM, FM1, FM2,
XM1, XM2, or WX, if equipped. Touch the desired
audio source to select it.
Preset Station Menu
Up to 36 stations, 6 AM, 6 FM 1, 6 FM 2, 6 XM 1,
6 XM 2, and 6 WX, if equipped, can be programmed for
home and for away. To store presets, do the following:
1. Turn the audio system on.
2. Touch AM, FM, XM, or WX, if equipped, to display
the desired source. The preset station menu will
appear.
3. Tune to the desired station by using the
TUNE/SEEK arrows.
4. Touch SOUND to set the bass, mid-range, treble,
and DSP for your preset, if desired. See “Sound
Menu” later in this section for more information.
5. Touch and hold one of the six numbered preset
buttons for more than two seconds until you hear
a beep.
6. Repeat the steps for each preset and source.
SCAN: To scan stations, touch SCAN. The radio will go
to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Touch SCAN again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, touch and hold SCAN
for two seconds. It will only scan the audio source it is
in, with the exception of FM 1 and FM 2, which will both
be scanned if in that source. Touch SCAN again to
stop scanning.
RDS (Radio Data System): See “Radio Data System
(RDS)” later in this section for more information.
MSG (Message): See “Radio Data System (RDS)” later
in this section for more information.
AutoSet: Touch AutoSet to replace currently stored
preset stations with the strongest stations available in
the immediate area. Touch AutoSet again to return
to the original preset stations.
SOUND: See “Sound Menu” following for more
information.
DSP: See “Adjusting the Speakers” later in this section
for more information.
4-59
Sound Menu
3. Touch the F for front or R for rear to adjust the fade
of the speakers.
4. Touch DSP to adjust your DSP, if equipped. See
“Adjusting the Speakers” later in this section for
more information.
After adjustments are made, touch any source screen
button. This will take you back to the preset station
menu. Whenever you touch that screen button,
the previously stored information you have entered for
each preset station will be recalled.
To adjust the tone for each preset, do the following:
1. Press the BAND key.
2. Touch AM, FM1, FM2, XM1, XM2, or WX, if
equipped, to access the desired preset screen.
Touch SOUND at the bottom of the main audio screen,
source menu, or DSP menu to change the tone, DSP,
if equipped, fade, and balance for all sources. The audio
system has a separate setting for these features for
each source preset. However, the audio system keeps
one fade and one balance setting for all audio sources.
To adjust sound settings, do the following:
1. Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) signs to adjust
treble, mid-range, and bass.
2. Touch the L for left or R for right to adjust the
balance of the speakers.
4-60
3. Touch SOUND.
4. Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) signs to adjust
treble, mid-range, and bass.
5. Touch Return to exit. This will take you to the
preset station menu.
6. Touch and hold one of the six preset screen buttons
for more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
Whenever you touch that preset for less than
two seconds, the station and previously stored
information you have entered for each preset station
will be recalled.
7. Repeat the steps for additional presets.
Adjusting the Speakers
To save DSP settings for your preset stations, use the
SOUND menu or touch DSP from the preset station
menu to access the DSP menu. See “Sound Menu”
listed previously in this section for more information.
Touch DSP to change the following options:
ON/OFF: Touch ON/OFF to turn DSP on and off.
DRIVER SEAT: Touch this button to adjust the audio to
give the driver the best possible sound quality.
TALK: TALK makes spoken words sound very clear.
Touch this button when listening to non-musical material
such as news, talk shows, and sports broadcasts.
SPACIOUS: Touch this button to make the listening
space seem larger.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing): The DSP feature is
used to provide a choice of four different listening
experiences. DSP can be used while listening to the
audio system or the CD player. The audio system can
store separate DSP settings for each source and
preset station, except WX, which is always set to TALK.
SOUND: Touch SOUND to access the Sound menu.
See “Sound Menu” listed previously in this section
for more information.
4-61
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
RDS: Touch RDS to use alternate RDS functions
located in the preset menu. When you touch RDS,
you will only have about five seconds to choose RDS
ON/OFF, TA, MSG, PTY, or SEL PTY. If you do
not make a selection, the system will return to the
previous menu.
If you are tuned to a station broadcasting RDS
information, the station’s Program Service (PS) and
Program Type (PTY) will replace the station’s frequency
on the status line at the top of the display. After about
five seconds, if available, the PTY will be replaced
on the display by the station’s PTY name. The PTY and
PTY name may be the same or different.
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. With RDS, the radio
can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
4-62
If the audio system is tuned to a station that is not
broadcasting RDS information, the station’s frequency
will remain on the display. While RDS is on, the
audio system will search for a stronger station in the
network if a station gets too weak for listening.
The RDS feature relies upon receiving specific
information from RDS stations. These features will only
work when RDS information is available.
TA (Traffic): Touch TA to receive traffic announcements.
The audio system will turn on the TA display. TA will
appear on the display if the current station broadcasts
traffic announcements. You may also receive traffic
announcements from stations in the network related to
the current station. If the current station does not
broadcast traffic announcements, the audio system will
seek to a station which will. When the audio system finds
a station which broadcasts traffic announcements, it will
stop. If no station is found, TA will turn off.
While a traffic announcement plays, the audio system
uses TA volume. To increase TA volume, touch the VOL
button on your steering wheel or use the VOL up or down
buttons during the announcement. See “Voice Guidance
Volume Settings” under Setup Menu on page 4-13 for
more information.
When a traffic announcement comes on the current radio
station or a related network station, you will hear it even if
the volume is muted or a CD is playing. If the audio
system tunes to a related network station for a traffic
announcement, it will return to the original station when
the announcement is finished. If the CD player was being
used, the CD will stay in the player and resume play at
the point where it stopped.
Touch RDS followed by TA again to turn TA off.
MSG (Message): When RDS is on, if the current station
has a message, MSG will appear on the display. Touch
MSG from the preset menu to view the message. If the
whole message does not appear on the display, parts of
the message will appear every three seconds until the
message is completed. Once the complete message has
been displayed, MSG will disappear from the display until
another new message is received. MSG will remain
available to allow you to display the entire message
again.
PTY: PTY allows you to seek only stations with types
of programs you want to listen to. This button is used to
turn on and off Program Type (PTY) features.
With RDS on, touch RDS, followed by PTY. The PTY
display will turn on. Touch RDS followed by this button
again to turn the PTY display off.
Select PTY (Select Program Type): With RDS and
PTY on, touch RDS, then SEL PTY. The PTY menu will
appear. Use the up and down arrows to select a PTY.
Touch your PTY selection and the system will return
you to the screen with the preset stations shown.
See Steps 1 through 7 under “Preset Station Menu” to
store the selected PTYs. The selected PTY is then
stored on the preset. You can now touch the PTY preset
to recall your settings.
When the PTY display is on, press TUNE/SEEK and
SCAN to find radio stations of the PTY selected. The last
PTY selected will be used for seek and scan modes.
If a station with the selected PTY is not found, NONE
FOUND will appear on the display. If both PTY and TA
are on, the audio system will search for stations with
traffic announcements and the selected PTY.
4-63
PTY (Program Type) Presets: The six presets let you
return to your favorite PTYs. These presets have
factory PTY preset stations. See “RDS Program Type
(PTY) Selections” later in this section. You can set up to
12 PTYs, 6 FM 1 and 6 FM2. To save a PTY preset,
do the following:
1. Touch FM1 or FM2.
2. Touch RDS to enter the RDS menu.
3. Touch RDS ON/OFF to turn RDS on.
4. Touch PTY.
5. Touch SEL PTY and select the desired PTY from
the list.
6. Touch and hold one of the six presets for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. Whenever
you touch that numbered preset for less than
two seconds, the PTY you set will return.
7. Repeat the steps for each preset.
Once you have stored a PTY for each of your preset
stations, you can recall a PTY preset by touching
the preset station for less than two seconds. Then use
TUNE/SEEK or SCAN to locate a station for that
PTY selection.
4-64
ALERT: This type of announcement warns of national or
local emergencies. You will not be able to turn off alert
announcements. Alert announcements will come on
even if RDS mode is turned off. ALERT appears on the
display when an alert announcement plays. The audio
system uses TA volume during these announcements.
To increase volume, touch the VOL button on your
steering wheel or use the VOL up and down buttons
during the announcement. See “Voice Guidance Volume
Settings” under Setup Menu on page 4-13 for more
information. When an alert announcement comes on the
tuned radio station or a related network station, you will
hear it even if the volume is muted or a CD is playing.
If the audio system tunes to a related network station for
an alert announcement, it will return to the original station
when the announcement is finished. If the CD player is
playing, the player will stop for the announcement and
resume when the announcement is finished.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and in Canada. XM™ offers
a large variety of coast-to-coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk/weather (U.S. subscribers),
and children’s programming. XM™ provides digital
quality audio and text information that includes
the channel name and number, song title, and
artist name. A service fee is required in order to
receive the XM™ service. For more information,
contact XM™; in the U.S. at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696) or in Canada at
www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
INFO (Information): Touch INFO while in XM™ mode
to retrieve various pieces of information related to
the current song or channel. By touching INFO, you may
retrieve four different categories of information: Artist
Name/Feature, Song/Program Title, Channel Category,
and other Additional Information that may be broadcast
on that channel. Additional Information messages
may only be available at certain times or on certain
programs. If an Additional Information message is being
broadcast on the tuned channel, INFO will appear on
the display.
Each of the four information types may have multiple
pages of text. To reach a category, touch INFO
repeatedly until the desired type is displayed. If there
are multiple pages of text for the information selected
type, the radio will automatically display all the pages for
that type at a rate of about one page every three
seconds before timing out and returning to the default
display. You may override this feature by touching INFO
to review all of the pages at your own pace.
4-65
Setting Program Type (PTY) Preset
Stations
SCATT (Category): Press the arrows to select a
category.
Once the desired category is displayed, press
TUNE/SEEK to select the category and take you to the
category’s first station. If you want to go to another
station within that category, press TUNE/SEEK once.
XM™ Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): XL on the radio
display, after the channel name, indicates content with
explicit language. These channels, or any others,
can be blocked at a customer’s request by calling
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated and no action is required.
Touch and hold one of the desired P1-P6 presets
to store the selected station as a preset. If PTY times
out and is no longer on the display, start again.
No XM signal: The vehicle is in a location that is
blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle is moved
into an open area, the signal should return.
SCAN: Use this button to scan through the channels
within a category or scan through the preset stations.
To scan through the channels in a category, do the
following:
Loading XM: The audio system is processing audio
and text data received. No action is needed.
1. Select a category by using the category arrows.
2. Once the desired category is displayed, touch
SCAN. The radio will begin scanning within the
chosen category.
3. Touch SCAN again to stop scanning.
To scan through your preset stations, touch and hold
SCAN. Touch SCAN again to stop scanning.
4-66
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available.
The system is working properly.
No Title Info: No song title information is available.
The system is working properly.
No CAT Info: No category information is available.
The system is working properly.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
No Information: No text or informational messages
are available. The system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM™ receiver may have
previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having
your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
will alternate with the XM™ Radio eight digit radio
ID label. This label is needed to activate the service.
Six-Disc CD Changer
With the compact disc changer, you can play up to
six normal size discs continuously.
When the radio is turned on, the changer will begin
checking for discs. This will continue for up to one and
a half minutes, depending on the number of discs
loaded. You may hear noise, but this is normal.
The CD changer is initializing.
Press the CD hard key to access the six-disc CD
changer screen. You can also use the system’s DVD
player for single CD play once the map DVD is removed.
See CD/DVD Player on page 4-70 for more information.
If no CD is loaded in the CD/DVD Player and you
press the CD hard key, the message “No CD Loaded”
will appear on the display.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned
to channel 0, there may be a receiver fault. Consult with
your dealer/retailer.
Check XM Receiver: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver may have
a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
4-67
The numbered buttons (1 through 6) represent the order
of the discs loaded in the changer. If there are only
two CDs loaded, buttons 1 and 2 will only be available
to choose from.
LOAD: Touch this button once each time you wish to
load a CD into the changer. It may take up to
10 seconds for the changer to accept the CD into the
slot depending on the changer initializing. Repeat
this procedure for loading up to six discs. Press and
hold the LOAD button until a beep is heard to put
the changer in LOAD ALL mode. Once the Insert CD
message is displayed, you can load all six discs,
one after the other.
CD Changer Screen
Once you access the CD changer screen, you can
select one of the numbered buttons to go from
one compact disc to another among those loaded in
the CD changer and use the arrows to rewind or
fast forward through the disc selected.
The following features are also available from this
screen:
•
•
•
•
LOAD
EJECT
SCAN THE DISCS or SCAN THE TRACKS
and RANDOM ALL or RANDOM DISC.
4-68
r (Play):
Touch this button to begin playing a CD.
RANDOM DISC: Touch this button to hear the tracks in
random, rather than sequential, order on the disc
selected. Press the TUNE/SEEK hard key to randomly
seek through the tracks on this disc. Touch RANDOM
DISC again to turn off random play mode.
SCAN TRACKS: Touch this button to hear the first
10 seconds of each track on the selected disc. Touch
this button again to stop scanning. The CD will mute
while scanning.
r (Rewind): Touch this button to rewind quickly
through a track selection.
EJECT: Touch this button once to eject the chosen CD.
The chosen CD may be selected by first touching one
of the numbered buttons from 1 to 6. Repeat this
procedure for ejecting up to six discs from the changer.
If you press and hold the EJECT button until a beep
is heard, The system will begin to eject all of the discs
from the player. Once the CD is removed the next
will come out until they are all ejected.
j (Pause): Touch this button to pause CD play.
Touch it again to resume play or touch the play button.
RANDOM ALL: Touch this button to hear the tracks on
all of the discs in the CD changer in random, rather than
sequential, order. Press the TUNE/SEEK hard key while
RANDOM ALL is on to randomly seek within that disc.
Touch RANDOM ALL again to turn off random mode.
Press the down arrow to seek to the previous selection
on the compact disc. If playing the first track of disc,
pressing the down arrow will seek to the last track on the
selected disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
RDS (Radio Data Systems): See “Radio Data Systems
(RDS)” listed previously for information on this button.
SOUND: See “Sound Menu (Tone, DSP, Fade and
Balance)” for information on this button.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing): See “Adjusting the
Speakers” listed previously for information on this button.
CD Changer Errors
CDX ERROR could be displayed for the following:
• The road is too rough. The disc should play when
the road is smoother.
SCAN DISCS: Touch this button to hear the first
10 seconds of first track on each disc. Touch this button
again to stop scanning. The CD will mute while scanning.
• The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or not loaded label
[ (Forward):
Touch this button to fast forward quickly
through a track selection.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
«TUNE SEEK ª: Press the up arrow on the
TUNE/SEEK switch to seek to the next selection on the
compact disc. If playing last track of disc, pressing
the up arrow will seek to the first track of the next disc.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, please contact your dealer/retailer. If your
audio system displays an error number, write it down
and provide this information to your dealer/retailer when
reporting the error.
side up.
try again.
4-69
CD/DVD Player
3. If one is loaded, the navigation map DVD will eject
from the slot.
The player that is used for the navigation map DVD can
also be used as a single music CD player or a video
DVD player.
4. Gently remove the navigation map DVD from the
slot and return it to its case.
CD Player
5. Insert the music CD into the slot. The system will
pull the CD into the player.
To use the player as a single music CD player, you
must first remove the navigation map DVD. While
playing a CD in the CD/DVD Player, the navigation
system is not available. The message “The disc installed
is not a map DVD” will appear on the display if any of
the navigation hard keys are pressed.
To remove the navigation map DVD and load a music
CD, use the following steps:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Press the TILT hard key until you hear a beep.
This will open the faceplate of the system.
4-70
6. Press and release the TILT hard key to close the
faceplate.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) with the system’s
faceplate open will cause the faceplate to close
automatically. This could cause damage to a CD,
DVD or the system if it is partially loaded. Before
shifting out of PARK (P), make sure that the DVD or
CD is loaded properly. The vehicle must be shifted
back into PARK (P) to close the faceplate.
SCAN TRACKS: Touch this button to hear the first
10 seconds of each track on the disc. Touch this button
again to stop scanning. The CD will mute while
scanning.
REPEAT TRACK: Touch this button to repeat the
selected track.
r (Rewind): Touch this button to rewind quickly
through a track selection.
j (Pause): Touch this button to pause CD play.
Touch it again to resume play or touch the play button.
[ (Forward):
CD Player Screen
Once a music CD is loaded, the CD player menu will
appear on the display. When using the system as
a single CD player, the CD hard key will alternate
between the CD player and the six-disc CD changer if
CDs are loaded.
r (Play):
Touch this button to begin playing a CD.
RANDOM: Touch this button to hear the tracks
in random, rather than sequential, order on the disc.
Touch RANDOM again to turn off random mode.
Touch this button to fast forward
quickly through a track selection.
«TUNE SEEK ª: Touch the up arrow on the
TUNE/SEEK hard key to seek to the next selection on
the compact disc. If playing the last track of the disc,
touching the up arrow will seek to the first track of the
disc. Touch the down arrow to seek to the previous
selection on the compact disc. If playing the first track of
the disc, touching the down arrow will seek to the last
track of the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
4-71
DVD Player
To use the player as a video DVD player, you must
first remove the navigation map DVD or music CD.
While playing a video DVD, the navigation system is
not available. The message “The disc installed is not a
map DVD” will appear on the display if any of the
navigation hard keys are pressed.
This feature will not operate unless the vehicle is in
PARK (P).
To remove the navigation map DVD and load a video
DVD, use the following steps:
1. With the vehicle in PARK (P) and the vehicle
running, press the TILT hard key until a beep
is heard. The faceplate of the system will open.
2. If a map DVD or a music CD is loaded, the system
will automatically eject it. Gently remove it from the
slot and return it to its case.
3. Load the video DVD into the slot. The system will
pull the DVD into the player.
4. Press and release the TILT hard key to close the
faceplate.
4-72
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) with the system’s
faceplate open will cause the faceplate to close
automatically. This could cause damage to a
CD, DVD or the system if it is partially loaded. Before
shifting out of PARK (P), make sure that the DVD
or CD is loaded properly. The vehicle must be
shifted back into PARK (P) to close the faceplate.
Once the faceplate is closed and a video DVD is loaded,
the system will automatically play the DVD.
Playing a DVD
There are three ways to play a DVD depending on
which screen you are on. They are the following:
• Once a DVD is inserted, the system will
automatically play the DVD.
• If you are on a map screen, touch the DVD source
button.
• From the audio screen, press the DVD hard key.
DVD Menu Options
To display the menu choices while a DVD is playing,
touch anywhere on the screen and the menu will appear.
VIEWING ANGLE: Touch this button to adjust the
viewing angle of the DVD. Some DVDs allow you to
change the camera angle. This may not be available on
all DVDs. Depending on the type of DVD you are
using, this button may or may not be available.
SUBTITLE: Touch this button to playback the video
with subtitles. This may not be available on all DVDs.
Depending on the type of DVD you are using, this button
may or may not be available.
SCREEN ADJUST: Touch this button to adjust the
brightness, contrast and red/green color adjustments.
CURSOR: Touch this button to access the left/right and
up/down cursors on the screen. The cursors allow
you to navigate menu options on the screen.
IMAGE: Touch this button to either start playing a DVD
or to remove the DVD menu screen.
AUDIO PROGRAM: Touch this button to change the
audio language heard.
MENU: Touch this button to access the DVDs menu
options. Depending on the type of DVD you are
using, this button may or may not be available. Touch
the button labeled one, two or blank to change the
image size displayed on the screen.
TITLE: Touch this button to display the title of the DVD.
Depending on the type of DVD you are using, this
button may or may not be available.
4-73
Under LANGUAGE PREFERENCES, you can select
different languages for AUDIO, SUBTITLE and
DVD MENUS.
1. To change languages, first select the option you
wish to change.
2. Select a language from the list given.
3. Touch RETURN to end out the menu.
Your language is now saved.
Under PARENTAL LOCK, you can select SET RATING
LIMIT and SET PIN.
To SET RATING, first touch the button. Then, make
your selection. Touch RETURN to end out the menu.
Your selection is now saved.
If TITLE is available, this button will allow you to
navigate through chapters or the DVD features.
Once the appropriate title or track has been selected,
press the Return button then the IMAGE button on
the DVD menu to view the movie in full screen.
SETTING: Touch this button to adjust the following:
• LANGUAGE PREFERENCES
• PARENTAL LOCK
To use PARENTAL LOCK, first touch the button.
Then, enter a four-digit numeric password.
Touch RETURN to end out the menu.
SEARCH: Touch this button to search to a certain
scene on the DVD. Depending on the type of DVD you
are using, this button may or may not be available.
r (Rewind): Touch this button to rewind through a
scene during playback.
r (Resume):
a DVD.
4-74
Touch this button to resume playing
Touch this button to advance rapidly
during playback.
Your audio system can store HOME and AWAY preset
stations. HOME and AWAY preset stations allow
you to use one set of preset radio settings in the area
where you live, and another set when you go out of
town. That way, you will not need to reprogram
your preset stations every time you travel.
L (Frame Advance):
To select HOME and AWAY preset stations, do the
following:
c (Stop):
j (Pause):
Touch this button to stop the DVD.
Touch this button to pause the DVD.
[ (Forward):
Touch this button to advance by
chapter during playback.
Radio Personalization with Home
and Away Feature
With this feature, you can recall the latest audio system
settings as adjusted the last time your vehicle was
operated. This feature allows two different drivers to
store and recall their own audio system settings.
The settings recalled by the audio system are
determined by which transmitter (1 or 2) was used to
enter the vehicle. The number on the back of the
transmitter corresponds to driver 1 or to driver 2.
The audio system settings will automatically adjust
to where they were last set by the identified driver.
The settings can also be recalled by briefly pressing
the MEMORY seat switches 1 or 2 located on the
driver’s door.
1. With the audio system on, touch the Audio hard key
and turn the audio system off.
2. Touch the HOME or AWAY button from the main
audio screen.
The next time the audio system is turned on, the
system will recall the last active preset selection.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your home audio system preset
stations because the audio system remembers them.
However, you will have to reset your away radio preset
stations.
4-75
Voice Recognition
The navigation system’s voice recognition allows for
hands-free operation of navigation and audio system
features. Voice recognition can be used when the
ignition is on or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
is active.
This feature only works if the map DVD is inserted and
I AGREE has been selected. If you try to use voice
recognition without the map DVD inserted, the system
will display “Please insert the navigation map DVD
to use the voice recognition feature.” See “Installing the
DVD Map Disc” under Maps on page 4-39.
To use navigation voice recognition, do the following:
1. Push and hold the talk
symbol steering wheel
control until you
hear a beep. The audio
system will mute.
2. Clearly state one of the commands listed on the
following pages. For example, say “FM1”.
3. The system will tell you the command being
implemented. For example, the system will say
“FM1 Radio” and change the audio system to the
FM1 source.
You can end voice recognition by not speaking any
commands. After about five seconds of silence,
the system will automatically cancel voice recognition.
At times, the system may not understand a spoken
command. If this happens, try saying the command
again. If a spoken command is not available, the system
will provide feedback based on availability.
While using voice recognition, make sure to keep interior
noise levels to a minimum. Otherwise, the system might
not recognize voice commands.
The system will only recognize commands spoken in
English.
4-76
Voice Recognition Commands
Radio Commands
The following list shows all of the voice commands
available for the navigation system with a brief
description of each. To use the voice commands, refer
to the instructions listed previously.
Radio: This command will change the audio system to
the next radio audio source.
Help Commands
These commands are universal and will enable you to
use the help prompts available from the system.
Map Help: This command will enable the system to
provide the available commands for the map screen.
Destination Help: This command will enable the
system to provide the available commands for entering
a destination.
AM: This command will change the audio system to the
AM audio source.
FM1: This command will change the audio system to
the FM1 audio source.
FM2: This command will change the audio system to
the FM2 audio source.
XM1: This command will change the audio system to
the XM1 audio source.
XM2: This command will change the audio system to
the XM2 audio source.
Guidance Help: This command will enable the system
to provide the available commands for the guidance
method.
CD Changer: This command will change the audio
system to the CD changer audio source.
Radio Help: This command will enable the system to
provide the available commands for the radio.
WX, Weather Band: These commands will change the
audio system to the weather band audio source.
Disc Help: This command will enable the system to
provide the available commands for the CD changer.
Power On, Audio On: These commands will turn the
system’s power on.
Power Off, Audio Off: These commands will turn the
system’s power off.
4-77
Seek Up: This command will cause the selected audio
source to seek up to the next strongest signal.
Seek Down: This command will cause the selected
audio source to seek down to the next strongest signal.
Stop Scan: This command will cause the audio
source to stop scanning for the next strongest signal.
CD Changer Commands
Track Up: This command will cause the CD changer to
skip up to the next track.
Previous Track, Track Down: This command will
cause the CD changer to go to the previous track.
Screen Commands
Position Commands
Current Position, Current Location, Show Current
Position, Show Current Location: These commands
will cause the system to display the vehicle’s current
location on the map screen.
Map: This command will cause the system to display
the map screen.
Map Commands
Zoom In: This command will cause the system to zoom
in when on the map screen.
Zoom Out: This command will cause the system to
zoom out when on the map screen.
Screen Day Mode, Day Mode On: These commands
will adjust the system’s screen setting to the day mode.
Maximum Scale: This command will cause the system
to zoom out to the maximum available map scale
when on the map screen.
Screen Night Mode, Night Mode On: These
commands will adjust the system’s screen setting to the
night mode.
Minimum Scale: This command will cause the system
to zoom in to the minimum available map scale when
on the map screen.
Screen Auto Mode, Auto Mode On: These commands
will adjust the system’s screen setting to auto mode.
Heading Up, Change to Heading Up: These commands
will cause the system to display the Vehicle Up heading
when on the map screen. The map scale should be set
for under 2 miles (4 km).
Screen Off: This command will turn the system’s
screen display off.
4-78
North Up, Change to North Up: These commands will
cause the system to display the North Up heading
when on the map screen if the map scale is set
to 2 miles (4 km) or less.
Map Direction, Change Map Direction: These
commands will cause the system to change the vehicle’s
direction from North Up to Heading Up or Heading Up
to North Up on the map screen if the map scale is set
to 2 miles (4 km) or less.
Guidance Commands
Repeat Guidance, Repeat Voice: These commands
will cause the system to repeat the last available
voice prompt guidance command if a destination has
been set.
Louder: This command will cause the system to
increase the volume of the navigation voice prompts if a
destination has been set.
Mark, Mark This Point: These commands will cause
the system to mark the location as a memory point while
on the map screen.
Softer: This command will cause the system to
decrease the volume of the navigation voice prompts if
a destination has been set.
Destination Commands
Voice Guidance Off: This command will cause the
system to turn off the navigation voice prompts if
a destination has been set.
Home, Go Home: These commands will cause the
system to enter the Home destination, if one is set.
Go To Starting Point, Previous Starting Point:
These commands will cause the system to enter the
last available starting point as a destination.
Voice Guidance On: This command will cause the
system to turn on the navigation voice prompts if
a destination has been set.
Open Guidance, Open Guidance Screen, Open
Guide, Open Guide Screen: These commands will
cause the system to open the Guidance Appearance
menu if a destination has been set.
4-79
Close Guidance, Close Guidance Screen, Close
Guide, Close Guide Screen: These commands
will cause the system to close the Guidance Appearance
menu if a destination has been set.
Arrow Guidance, Arrow Guide, Change To Arrow
Guidance, Change To Arrow Guide: These
commands will cause the system to change to Arrow
Guidance screen view in the Guidance Menu if a
destination has been set.
Turn List Guidance, Turn List Guide, Change to
Turn List Guidance, Change to Turn List Guide:
These commands will cause the system to change to
Turn List Guidance screen view in the Guidance Menu
if a destination has been set.
Entire Route, Entire Route Map, Route Overview:
These commands will cause the system to display the
entire route if a destination has been set.
Reroute: This command will cause the system to
generate an alternate route to a set destination while on
a planned route.
Detour, Detour Entire Route: These commands will
cause the system to activate the detour feature
when driving a planned route.
4-80
Delete Destination, Cancel Destination: These
commands will cancel a destination if one has been set.
Next Waypoint Map: This command will cause the
system to display the map view of the next waypoint
location if one has been set.
First Waypoint Map: This command will cause the
system to display the map view of the first waypoint
location if one has been set.
Second Waypoint Map: This command will cause the
system to display the map view of the second waypoint
location if more than one waypoint has been set.
Third Waypoint Map: This command will cause the
system to display the map view of the third waypoint
location if more than two waypoints have been set.
Fourth Waypoint Map: This command will cause the
system to display the map view of the fourth waypoint
location if more than three waypoints have been set.
Fifth Waypoint Map: This command will cause
the system to display the map view of the fifth waypoint
location if more than four waypoints have been set.
Destination Map: This command will cause the system
to display the map view of the final destination location
if one has been set.
Point of Interest (POI) Commands
The following commands will cause the system to display
icons if they are available on the map screen when the
map scale is set to a half mile (eight-tenths km) or less.
Restaurant, I’m Hungry: These commands will cause
the system to display restaurant POI icons.
American Restaurant, American Food: These
commands will cause the system to display American
restaurant POI icons.
Chinese Restaurant, Chinese Food: These
commands will cause the system to display Chinese
restaurant POI icons.
Continental Restaurant, Continental Food: These
commands will cause the system to display Continental
restaurant POI icons.
French Restaurant, French Food: These commands
will cause the system to display French restaurant
POI icons.
Italian Restaurant, Italian Food: These commands will
cause the system to display Italian restaurant POI icons.
Japanese Restaurant, Japanese Food: These
commands will cause the system to display Japanese
restaurant POI icons.
Mexican Restaurant, Mexican Food: These
commands will cause the system to display Mexican
restaurant POI icons.
Seafood Restaurant, Seafood: These commands
will cause the system to display Seafood restaurant
POI icons.
Other Restaurant, Other Food: These commands will
cause the system to display other types of restaurant
POI icons.
Shopping, Shopping Mall: These commands will
cause the system to display mall POI icons.
Grocery Store: This command will cause the system to
display grocery store POI icons.
Gas Station, Gas: These commands will cause the
system to display gas station POI icons.
Parking Garage: This command will cause the system
to display parking garage POI icons.
Parking Lot: This command will cause the system to
display parking lot POI icons.
Rental Car Agency: This command will cause the
system to display rental car POI icons.
4-81
Automobile Club, Triple A: These commands will
cause the system to display auto club POI icons.
Winery: This command will cause the system to
display winery POI icons.
Auto Service And Maintenance, Auto Service,
Maintenance: These commands will cause the system
to display auto service POI icons.
City Hall: This command will cause the system to
display city hall POI icons.
Hotel: This command will cause the system to display
hotel POI icons.
Golf Course: This command will cause the system to
display golf course POI icons.
Ski Resort, Skiing: These commands will cause the
system to display ski resort POI icons.
Amusement Park: This command will cause the
system to display amusement park POI icons.
Sport Complex, Stadium: These commands will cause
the system to display sports complex POI icons.
Casino: This command will cause the system to display
casino POI icons.
Marina: This command will cause the system to display
marina POI icons.
Tourist Attraction: This command will cause the
system to display tourist attraction POI icons.
4-82
Police Station: This command will cause the system
to display police station POI icons.
Library: This command will cause the system to
display library POI icons.
Hospital: This command will cause the system to
display hospital POI icons.
Park & Recreation, Parks & Recreation: These
commands will cause the system to display parks and
recreation POI icons.
Civic Center, Community Center: These commands
will cause the system to display community center
POI icons.
Convention Center, Exhibition Center: These
commands will cause the system to display convention
center POI icons.
Court House: This command will cause the system to
display court house POI icons.
Train Station: This command will cause the system to
display train station POI icons.
Museum: This command will cause the system to
display museum POI icons.
Airport: This command will cause the system to
display airport POI icons.
Bank: This command will cause the system to display
bank POI icons.
Bus Station: This command will cause the system to
display bus station POI icons.
School: This command will cause the system to
display school POI icons.
Commuter Rail Station: This command will cause the
system to display commuter rail station POI icons.
ATM: This command will cause the system to display
ATM POI icons.
Ferry Terminal: This command will cause the system
to display ferry terminal POI icons.
Higher Education, University, College: These
commands will cause the system to display higher
education POI icons.
Park & Ride: This command will cause the system to
display park & ride POI icons.
Rest Area, Rest Stop: These commands will cause
the system to display rest area POI icons.
Tourist Information: This command will cause the
system to display tourist information POI icons.
Historical Monument: This command will cause the
system to display historical monument POI icons.
Business Facility: This command will cause the
system to display business facility POI icons.
City Center: This command will cause the system to
display city center POI icons.
POI Off: This command will cause the system to turn
off POIs so they do not appear on the map screen.
Performing Arts: This command will cause the system
to display performing arts POI icons.
4-83
✍ NOTES
4-84
Section 5
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........5-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................5-2
Drunk Driving .................................................5-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................5-3
Braking .........................................................5-4
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................5-5
Braking in Emergencies ...................................5-5
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................5-6
Magnetic Ride Control .....................................5-7
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .....................................5-7
StabiliTrak® System ........................................5-8
Steering ........................................................5-9
Off-Road Recovery .......................................5-11
Passing .......................................................5-12
Loss of Control .............................................5-12
Racing or Other Competitive Driving (XLR-V) ......5-13
Driving at Night ............................................5-14
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................5-14
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................5-15
Highway Hypnosis ........................................5-16
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................5-16
Winter Driving ..............................................5-17
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow .............................................5-21
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................5-22
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................5-22
Towing ..........................................................5-27
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................5-27
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................5-27
Towing a Trailer ...........................................5-27
5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Drunk Driving
{CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-6.
{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death.
These simple defensive driving techniques
could save your life.
5-2
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness,
and judgment can be affected by even a
small amount of alcohol. You can have a
serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive
after drinking. Do not drink and drive or ride
with a driver who has been drinking. Ride
home in a cab; or if you are with a group,
designate a driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your
vehicle while driving — brakes, steering, and
accelerator. At times, as when driving on snow or ice,
it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. Meaning, you can lose
control of your vehicle. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 5-6 and StabiliTrak® System on
page 5-8.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6-3.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
5-3
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-50.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
5-4
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the
engine stops, you will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the
power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6-3.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and
you might even notice that the brake pedal moves
a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light will
stay on. See Antilock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-51.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might hear
a motor or clicking noise and feel the brake pedal
move a little during a stop, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
5-5
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system works the rear brakes and reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
The TRAC SYSTEM ACTIVE message will display on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the traction
control system is limiting wheel spin. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-63. You may feel or hear
the system working, but this is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
reengage the cruise control. See Adaptive Cruise
Control on page 3-15 or Cruise Control on page 3-12 for
more information.
5-6
This warning light will
come on to let you know
if there is a problem
with your traction
control system.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 3-52. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to. You
should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck
in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on
page 5-22 and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5-21 for more information.
To turn the system off,
press the front part of the
traction control button
located on the center
console.
The TRACTION SYSTEM OFF message will display on
the DIC and the traction control system warning light
will come on. If the system is limiting wheel spin when
you press the button, the TRACTION SYSTEM OFF
message will display – but the system will not turn
off right away. It will wait until there is no longer
a current need to limit wheel spin.
You can turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again. The TRACTION SYSTEM
ON message should display briefly on the Driver
Information Center. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-63 for more information.
Magnetic Ride Control
Magnetic Ride Control automatically adjusts the ride
of your vehicle. Automatic ride control is achieved
through a computer used to control and monitor the
suspension system. The controller receives input from
various sensors to determine the proper system
response. If the controller detects a problem within the
system, the DIC will display a SERVICE RIDE
CONTROL message. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-63 for more information. See your dealer
for service.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Your limited-slip rear axle can give you additional
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like
a standard axle most of the time, but when one of
the rear wheels has no traction and the other does,
this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move
the vehicle.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 6-3 for more information.
5-7
StabiliTrak® System
The StabiliTrak® System is a computer controlled
system that helps the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. This is
accomplished by selectively applying any one of the
vehicle’s brakes.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away (6 mph (10 km/h)), especially during cold weather,
the message STABILITRAK WARMING may be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC), the
instrument panel cluster light will be on, and a chime
will sound. This is normal. You can acknowledge
this message by pressing the RESET button.
The StabiliTrak® System performance is affected until
the message, STABILITRAK READY, is displayed in the
DIC. This can take up to 15 minutes.
The WAIT FOR STABILITRAK message may be
displayed in the DIC after exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h)
for 10 seconds if the steering is not centered.
The system is off until the STABILITRAK ACTIVE
message is displayed.
5-8
The STABILITRAK ACTIVE message will come on
when the system is operating. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-63 for more information. You
may also feel or hear the system working. This
is normal.
The instrument panel
cluster light will come on
and a chime will sound
to let you know if there is a
problem with the system.
The SERVICE STABILITRAK message will also be
displayed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-63 for more information.
When this light and the SERVICE STABILITRAK
message are on, the system is not operational.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
The system comes on automatically whenever you start
your vehicle. To help maintain directional control of
the vehicle, you should always leave the system on.
You can turn the system off if you ever need to. If you
turn the StabiliTrak® system off, the Traction Control
System will also be turned off. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
To turn the system off,
press and hold the front
part of the traction
control button on the
console for five seconds
with the vehicle stopped.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Magnetic Speed Variable Assist
Steering
Your vehicle has a steering system that continuously
adjusts the effort you feel when steering at all vehicle
speeds. It provides ease when parking, yet a firm,
solid feel at highway speeds.
Steering Tips
You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing
the button. The DIC will display the appropriate message
when you push the button, either TRAC/STABILITRAK
ON or TRAC/STABILITRAK OFF.
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you will understand this.
5-9
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 5-6.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions.
Under less favorable conditions you will want to go
slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the
front wheels are straight ahead.
5-10
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6-3.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on
page 5-4. It is better to remove as much speed as you
can from a possible collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to
go straight down the roadway.
5-11
Passing
Skidding
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
we suggest the following tips:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
5-12
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Racing or Other Competitive
Driving (XLR-V)
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is
slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such as enough water, ice,
or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored
surface — and slow down when you have any doubt.
Notice: If you use your vehicle for racing or other
competitive driving, the engine may use more
oil than it would with normal use. Low oil levels can
damage the engine. Be sure to check the oil level
often during racing or other competitive driving and
keep the level at or near 2 quarts (2 L) above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range
on the engine oil dipstick. For information on
how to add oil, see Engine Oil on page 6-16.
After the competitive driving, remove excess oil
so that the level on the dipstick is not above
the upper mark that shows the proper operating
range.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
See your warranty book before using your vehicle for
racing or other competitive driving.
5-13
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
rearview mirror.
Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because your headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
Watch for animals.
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns
or curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
5-14
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They might
not work as well in a quick stop and could
cause pulling to one side. You could lose
control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road
is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
•
•
•
•
•
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full?
Windows clean — inside and outside?
•
•
•
•
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
Have up-to-date maps?
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 6-52.
5-15
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could
get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes
on a steep downhill slope.
5-16
Winter Driving
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies
in your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles.
And, if you will be driving under severe conditions,
include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet,
or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction.
Be sure you properly secure these items in your
vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 6-52.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
5-17
Driving On Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to be
very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
The Traction Control System (TCS) improves your
ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road.
Even though you have TCS, slow down and adjust your
driving to the road conditions. Under certain conditions,
you might want to turn the TCS off, such as when
driving through deep snow and loose gravel, to help
maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 5-6. The StabiliTrak®
System might also activate. See StabiliTrak® System
on page 5-8.
5-18
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
See Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5-5.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.
On an otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear
in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach,
such as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead
of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you are actually on the ice, and avoid
sudden steering maneuvers.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
5-19
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
5-20
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with the headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5-22.
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too severe
for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the rocking method.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 6-73.
5-21
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear
the area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction
or stability system. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 5-6 and StabiliTrak® System on
page 5-8. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear,
wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and
press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels in
the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a
rocking motion that could free your vehicle. If that does
not get your vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. If your vehicle does need to be
towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 5-27.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification
label.
5-22
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 6-52 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-60.
There is also important loading information on
the vehicle Certification label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axle. See “Certification Label”
later in this section.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar)
of your vehicle. With the driver’s door open,
you will find the label attached below the door
latch. This label shows the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
5-23
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended
to tow a trailer.
5-24
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 1 = 400 lbs (181 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg)
(68 kg) x 1 =
Available Occupant and 250 lbs (113 kg)
Cargo Weight =
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 2 = 400 lbs (181 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
300 lbs (136 kg)
(68 kg) x 2 =
Available Cargo
100 lbs (45 kg)
Weight =
Example 3
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 3 = 400 lbs (181 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 200 lbs
400 lbs (181 kg)
(91 kg) x 2 =
Available Cargo
0 lbs (0 kg)
Weight =
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s capacity weight.
5-25
Certification Label
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
the rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
5-26
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.
If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the rear area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Service on page 8-7.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing your
vehicle may cause damage because of reduced
ground clearance. Always put your vehicle on
a flatbed truck.
Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended to be
towed with any of its wheels on the ground. If your
vehicle must be towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle”
earlier in this section.
Towing a Trailer
Your XLR is neither designed nor intended to tow
a trailer.
5-27
✍ NOTES
5-28
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................6-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................6-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................6-3
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ......6-4
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................6-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ..............................................6-4
Fuel ................................................................6-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................6-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................6-5
California Fuel ...............................................6-6
Additives .......................................................6-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................6-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................6-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................6-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................6-10
Hood Release ..............................................6-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................6-12
Engine Oil ...................................................6-16
Engine Oil Life System ..................................6-20
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................6-22
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................6-24
Engine Coolant .............................................6-24
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................6-27
Engine Overheating .......................................6-27
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ........................................6-29
Cooling System ............................................6-30
Power Steering Fluid .....................................6-35
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................6-36
Brakes ........................................................6-37
Battery ........................................................6-40
Jump Starting ...............................................6-41
Rear Axle .......................................................6-46
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................6-47
Headlamp Vertical Aiming ..............................6-48
Bulb Replacement ..........................................6-50
Windshield Replacement .................................6-50
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............6-50
Tires ..............................................................6-52
Winter Tires (XLR-V) .....................................6-53
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................6-54
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................6-56
Run-Flat Tires ..............................................6-58
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................6-60
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................6-61
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................6-63
6-1
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................6-65
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................6-66
Buying New Tires .........................................6-67
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................6-68
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................6-69
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................6-70
Wheel Replacement ......................................6-70
Tire Chains ..................................................6-73
Lifting Your Vehicle .......................................6-74
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................6-78
Appearance Care ............................................6-80
Interior Cleaning ...........................................6-80
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................6-81
Leather .......................................................6-82
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ........................................6-82
Wood Panels ...............................................6-82
Speaker Covers ............................................6-82
Care of Safety Belts ......................................6-83
Weatherstrips ...............................................6-83
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................6-83
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................6-84
6-2
Finish Care ..................................................6-84
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................6-85
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim ..................................................6-85
Tires ...........................................................6-86
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................6-86
Finish Damage .............................................6-87
Underbody Maintenance ................................6-87
Fiberglass Springs (Composite Springs) ...........6-87
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................6-87
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................6-88
Vehicle Identification ......................................6-89
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................6-89
Service Parts Identification Label .....................6-89
Electrical System ............................................6-89
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................6-89
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................6-90
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......6-90
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................6-90
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................6-90
Underhood Fuse Block ..................................6-94
Capacities and Specifications ..........................6-97
Service
Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle.
Your GM dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your
GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-51.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
6-3
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 8-16.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-50.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 7-15.
{CAUTION:
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise
and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
6-4
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 6-89.
Gasoline Octane
If your vehicle has the 4.6L V8 engine (VIN Code A),
use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular
unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but
your vehicle’s acceleration could be slightly reduced,
and you might notice a slight audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark knock. If the octane
is less than 87, you might notice a heavy knocking noise
when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you
could damage the engine. If you are using gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy
knocking, the engine needs service.
If your vehicle has the 4.4L V8 engine (VIN Code D),
use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 91 or higher. For best performance,
use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 93. In an emergency, you can use regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or higher.
If 87 octane fuel is used, do not perform any aggressive
driving maneuvers such as wide open throttle
applications. You might also hear audible spark knock
during acceleration. Refill the tank with premium fuel
as soon as possible to avoid damaging the engine.
If you are using gasoline rated at 91 octane or higher
and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or
3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines containing MMT.
See Additives on page 6-6 for additional information.
6-5
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance might be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might fail
a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-54. If this occurs, return to your authorized
dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
might not be covered by your warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle
experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves,
6-6
look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline. Also, your dealer/retailer has
additives that will help correct and prevent most
deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available
in your area. We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be
hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other
fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.
Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
6-7
The fuel door release
button is located on the
left side of the instrument
panel. The button only
works when the vehicle is
in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) and the
valet lockout button
is in OFF.
An alternate fuel door
release is located inside
the trunk behind a panel on
the driver’s side of the
vehicle. Pull the handle to
release the fuel door.
6-8
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible.
See Washing Your Vehicle on page 6-83.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-54.
The CHECK GAS CAP message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) will be displayed if the fuel
cap is not properly installed.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-54.
6-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is
in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge
from the container can ignite the fuel vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury
to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
6-10
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To lift the hood, use the following steps:
1. Pull the lever with this
symbol on it. It is
located on the lower
left side of the
instrument panel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release lever. The lever is
located under the hood near the center of the
vehicle. Move the release lever to the right and raise
the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
6-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 4.6L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
6-12
A. Battery. See Battery on page 6-40.
B. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 3-42.
C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 6-94.
D. Power Steering Fluid. See Power Steering Fluid on
page 6-35.
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6-22.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6-16.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6-16.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 6-37.
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on
page 6-27.
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 6-36.
6-13
When you open the hood on the 4.4L V8 XLR-V engine, here is what you will see:
6-14
A. Battery. See Battery on page 6-40.
B. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 3-42.
C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 6-94.
D. Power Steering Fluid. See Power Steering Fluid on
page 6-35.
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6-22.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6-16.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6-16.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 6-37.
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on
page 6-27.
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 6-36.
6-15
Engine Oil
If the LOW OIL LEVEL or LOW OIL PRESSURE
message on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
appears, check the engine oil level right away.
For more information, see LOW OIL LEVEL and
LOW OIL PRESSURE under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-63. You should check the engine
oil level regularly; this is an added reminder.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on
level ground.
6-16
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not
do this, the oil dipstick might not show the
actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check
the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of
oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on page 6-97.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
6-17
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
• GM4718M
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil
meeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting
this standard may be identified as synthetic.
However, not all synthetic oils will meet this
GM standard. Look for and use only an oil that
meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
6-18
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for this on the oil container, and use only those
oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard
GM4718M and have the starburst symbol on the front of
the oil container.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM4718M are all you need for good performance and
engine protection.
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirements for
your vehicle.
6-19
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated
can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the oil
is changed.
Notice: If your vehicle is an XLR-V model, the
engine uses a special oil filter. The use of any other
engine oil filter could lead to filter failure and
result in severe engine damage. Damage caused by
use of the wrong engine oil filter would not be
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
6-20
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL NOW message in the DIC
will come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-63. Change the oil as soon as possible within the
next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you
are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained
service people who will perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system. It is also important to
check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change
the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System and the Oil Life Indicator
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change the oil prior
to a CHANGE OIL NOW message in the DIC being
turned on, reset the system.
After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE OIL NOW
message and the oil life indicator must be reset. To
reset the message:
1. Press the up or down arrow to scroll the DIC to
show OIL LIFE.
2. Once the XXX% ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item is
highlighted, press and hold the RESET button until
the percentage shows 100%.
If the percentage does not return to 100% or if the
CHANGE OIL NOW message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling
center for help.
6-21
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filters.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filters
To inspect or replace the filters, do the following:
1. Some XLR-V vehicles, have a single piece black
cover that snaps over the entire air cleaner
assembly. For vehicles with this cover, simply pull it’s
left/right sides toward the outside of the vehicle and
lift up to remove cover. Reinstall the cover when you
are finished inspecting/replacing the filters.
Inspect the air cleaner/filters at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace them at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7-4 for more information.
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
filters at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filters
To inspect the air cleaner/filters, remove the filters from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filters to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filters remain caked with dirt,
new filters are required.
2. Move the clasps on the top of the engine air
cleaner/filter cover forward to unlatch the cover.
6-22
3. Lift the front of the cover at an angle and remove.
This is necessary due to the four tabs located on
the rear of the cover.
4. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter element and
any loose debris that might be found in the air
cleaner base.
5. Inspect or replace the filter.
6. Repeat the procedure for the second air
cleaner/filter.
Reverse the above procedure to reinstall the engine air
cleaner filter housings.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
6-23
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Engine Coolant
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the
dealer/retailer service department and have it repaired
as soon as possible.
There is a special procedure for checking and changing
the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is difficult,
you should have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department. Contact your dealer/retailer for additional
information or the procedure can be found in the service
manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 8-16.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-11.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 7-5, and be sure
to use the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7-11.
6-24
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 6-27.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Giving freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7-11 for more information.
6-25
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The engine coolant surge tank is located toward the
rear of the engine compartment on the driver’s side of
the vehicle. For more information on location, see
Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12.
6-26
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
FULL COLD mark, located on the side of the surge tank
that faces the front.
If the LOW COOLANT message on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on and stays on,
it means you are low on engine coolant. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-63 for more
information.
Adding Coolant
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, press down and
turn it clockwise until you hear a clicking sound.
Make sure the cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6-12 for more
information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find a COOLANT OVER TEMP message or an
ENGINE HOT, STOP ENGINE message displayed in
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-63. You will also hear a
chime.
There is also an engine coolant temperature gage on
the instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-53.
6-27
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine
is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 6-29 for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.
6-28
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on page 6-29 for
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant message,
can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no low
coolant message, but see or hear no steam, the problem
may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can
get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat setting
and fan speed and open the windows as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about
10 minutes. If the warning does not come back on,
you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you are parked. If you still have the
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of
the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in this section.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to
a safe place in an emergency situation. If an overheated
engine condition exists and the DIC message ENGINE
HOT, STOP ENGINE is displayed, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. Driving extended miles (km) in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil
on page 6-16.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
6-29
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
B. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
6-30
A low coolant level should be indicated by a LOW
COOLANT message on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). If it is, you may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,
radiator, water pump, or somewhere else in the cooling
system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant.
That could cause an engine fire, and you could
be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
on page 6-29 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running.
If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running.
If it is not, your vehicle needs service.
6-31
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD mark
on the front of the coolant surge tank, add a 50/50
mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling
system, including the coolant surge tank pressure
cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine Coolant on
page 6-24 for more information.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
CAUTION:
6-32
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot.
Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to
turn the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, the engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
The engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the cap and remove it.
6-33
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture
until the level inside the surge tank stabilizes at the
FULL COLD mark on the front of the surge tank.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level stabilizes at the FULL COLD mark
on the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the cap is
hand-tight and fully seated.
6-34
If the LOW COOLANT message does not appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) after two minutes, the
coolant is at the proper fill level. If a LOW COOLANT
message does appear, repeat Steps 1 through 3
then reinstall the pressure cap, or see your dealer.
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6-12 for
reservoir location.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.
What to Use
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-11.
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-11.
6-35
Windshield Washer Fluid
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
The LOW WASHER FLUID message will be displayed
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the
fluid is low.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 6-12 for reservoir
location.
6-36
Notice:
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6-12
for the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake hydraulic system.
If it is, you should have the brake hydraulic system fixed,
since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes
will not work well.
It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove
brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7-4.
6-37
Checking Brake Fluid
The brake fluid can be checked without taking off the
cap by looking at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above the MIN mark on the reservoir. If it is
not, have the brake hydraulic system checked to see
if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make
sure the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7-11. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
well. This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
See Washing Your Vehicle on page 6-83.
6-38
Brake Wear
Brake Pedal Travel
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are
pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
As you make brake stops, the disc brakes automatically
adjust for wear.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
brake parts. When you replace parts of the braking
system — for example, when the brake linings wear
down and you need new ones put in — be sure you get
new approved replacement parts. If you do not, the
brakes might not work properly. For example, if
someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your
vehicle, the balance between the front and rear
brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change in
many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
6-39
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label.
For battery replacement, see your dealer/retailer or the
service manual. To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on page 8-16.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if
you are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 6-41 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
6-40
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
See “Power Window Initialization” in Power Windows
on page 2-17.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
You must close all doors and the trunk before
reconnecting the battery. After reconnecting the battery,
you must press the unlock button on the keyless
access transmitter. Failure to follow this procedure could
result in the alarm sounding. Pressing unlock on the
keyless access transmitter will stop the alarm.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to
do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: If you try to start your vehicle by pushing
or pulling it, you could damage your vehicle. Do not
push or pull your vehicle to start it; instead, use
the jump starting procedure in this manual to start
your vehicle when the battery has run down.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
6-41
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 6-12 for more information on location.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
6-42
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
6-43
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
6-44
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
Perform “Power Window Initialize” steps under Power
Windows on page 2-17, if the vehicle has experienced
power loss.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
6-45
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
6-46
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler
plug hole.
What to Use
To add lubricant when the level is low, use SAE 75W-90
Synthetic Gear Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677) or
equivalent meeting GM Specification 9986115.
To completely refill after draining, add 4.7 ounces
(140 ml) of Limited-Slip Differential Lubricant Additive
(GM Part No. 1052358) or equivalent. Then fill to
the bottom of the filler plug hole with the Synthetic
Gear Lubricant.
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:
• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are
25 ft (7.6 m) from a light colored wall.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface which is level all the way to the wall.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular
to the wall.
• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud
attached to it.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.
The high intensity discharge (HID) visual optical aiming
type headlamps have been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment. If you suspect that
the headlamps need to be reaimed, it is recommended
that you contact your dealer/retailer for service.
However, it is possible for you to re-aim your headlamps
as described in the following procedure.
• The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg)
on the driver seat.
• Tires should be properly inflated.
• Start the vehicle and rock it to level the suspension.
Notice: To make sure your headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.
Failure to follow these instructions could cause
damage to headlamp parts.
6-47
Headlamp aiming is done with the low-beam headlamps.
The high-beam headlamps are correctly aimed if the
low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
The headlamp aiming
device is under the hood
near the headlamps.
Headlamp Vertical Aiming
To properly prepare the vehicle for vertical headlamp
aiming see Headlamp Aiming on page 6-47 for
more information.
To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:
Notice: Horizontal aiming must be performed
before making any adjustments to the vertical aim.
Adjusting the vertical aim first will result in an
incorrect headlamp aim.
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6-11
for more information.
2. Locate the aim dot on the inner projector lens of the
low-beam headlamp.
Adjustment screws can be turned with an E8 Torx®
socket or T15 Torx screwdriver.
6-48
3. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim
dot on each low-beam headlamp. Record this
distance.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard in front of the headlamp not
being aimed. This should allow only the beam of
light from the headlamp being aimed to be seen on
the flat surface.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mm
male hex.
4. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the
ground upward (A) to the recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
8. Turn the vertical
aiming screw until the
headlamp beam is
aimed to the horizontal
tape line.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall or flat
surface the width of the vehicle at the height of the
mark in Step 4.
6-49
9. The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned at
the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
Bulb Replacement
It is recommended that all bulbs be replaced by your
dealer/retailer.
Windshield Replacement
Your windshield is part of the Head-Up Display (HUD)
system. If you ever have to get your windshield
replaced, get one that is designed for HUD or your
HUD image may look out of focus.
10. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the
incorrect headlamp aim.
11. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
6-50
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-4
for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 7-13.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do the
following:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage the hook
and push the wiper arm (A) out of the blade (C).
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release lever click into
place.
6-51
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle warranty
booklet for details.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of
too much flexing. You could have
an air-out and a serious accident.
See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 5-22.
CAUTION:
6-52
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-60.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if
your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
Low-Profile Tires (XLR-V)
Winter Tires (XLR-V)
If your vehicle has P235/45R19 or P255/40R19
size tires, they are classified as low-profile
tires. These tires are designed for very
responsive driving on wet or dry pavement.
You may also notice more road noise with
low-profile performance tires and that they tend to
wear faster.
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance on
most surfaces but they may not offer the traction
you would like or the same level of performance as
winter tires on snow or ice covered roads.
Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,
they are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage
can occur when coming into contact with
road hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged
objects, or when sliding into a curb.
Your vehicle warranty does not cover this type
of damage. Keep tires set to the correct
inflation pressure and, when possible avoid
contact with curbs, potholes, and other
road hazards.
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter
tires, there may be decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After
switching to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
handling and braking.
See your dealer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
New Tires on page 6-67.
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range,
and speed rating as the original equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
6-53
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The example below shows a typical
passenger (p-metric) tire sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
6-54
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.
For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 6-69.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger (p-metric) vehicle tire size.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,
as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high
as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system.
The letter P as the first character in the tire size
means a passenger vehicle tire engineered
to standards set by the U. S. Tire and Rim
Association.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
6-55
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-60.
6-56
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 5-22.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 5-22.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 5-22.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 5-22.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-60
and Loading Your Vehicle on page 5-22.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
6-57
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 6-66.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 6-69.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 5-22.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Your Vehicle on page 5-22.
6-58
Run-Flat Tires
Your vehicle, when new, had run-flat tires. There is no
spare tire, no tire changing equipment, and no place
to store a tire in the vehicle. Run-flat tires perform
so well without any air that a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) is used to alert you if a tire has
lost pressure.
{CAUTION:
When the low tire warning light is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster, your vehicle’s
handling capabilities will be reduced during
severe maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You or others
could be injured. Do not drive over 55 mph
(90 km/h) when the low tire warning light is
displayed. Drive cautiously and check your tire
pressures as soon as you can.
If a tire goes flat, you will not need to stop on the side
of the road to change the tire. You can just keep on
driving. The shorter the distance you drive and the
slower the speed, the greater the chance that the tire
will not have to be replaced. If you drive on a deflated
run-flat tire for 25 miles (40 km) or less and at speeds of
55 mph (90 km/h) or less, there is a good chance that
the tire can be repaired. The tire can operate effectively
with no air pressure for up to 100 miles (160 km) at
speeds up to 55 mph (90 km/h), but the tire would then
have to be replaced. When a tire is filled with air, it
provides a cushion between the road and the wheel.
Because you will not have this cushion when driving on
a deflated tire, try to avoid potholes that could damage
your wheel and require replacement of it.
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair.
This damage could occur even before you have
driven on the tire in a deflated condition. When a tire
has been damaged, or if you have driven any distance
on a run-flat tire, check with an authorized run-flat
tire service center to determine whether the tire can be
repaired or should be replaced. To maintain your
vehicle’s run-flat feature, all replacement tires must be
self-supporting tires. As soon as possible, contact
the nearest authorized GM or run-flat servicing facility
for inspection and repair or replacement. To locate
the nearest GM or run-flat servicing facility, call
Roadside Assistance. For phone numbers and Roadside
Service details see Roadside Service on page 8-7.
{CAUTION:
Run-flat tires are constructed differently than
other tires and could explode during improper
service. You or others could be injured or
killed if you attempt to repair, replace,
dismount, or mount a run-flat tire. Let only
an authorized run-flat service center repair,
replace, dismount, and mount run-flat tires.
The valve stems on your run-flat tires have sensors that
are part of the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6-61. These
sensors contain batteries which are designed to last
for 10 years under normal driving conditions. See your
dealer/retailer if you ever need to have a wheel
replaced, or if the sensors ever need replacement.
6-59
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
6-60
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 5-22. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
6-61
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6-63, for
additional information.
6-62
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and
Industry and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210
of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire
and wheel assembly on your vehicle. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires
and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the
low tire pressure warning
light, located in the
instrument panel cluster.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light
and the DIC warning message appear at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can
be viewed by the driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-60 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-63.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 5-22, for an example of the
Tire and Loading Information label and its location on
your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-60 for additional information.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6-65, When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6-66,
and Tires on page 6-52.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors.
Sensor damage caused by using a tire sealant is not
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
6-63
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for
the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light
and DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the
conditions that can cause the malfunction light and
DIC message to come on are:
• The TPMS sensor matching process was not done
or not completed successfully. The DIC message
should go off after successfully completing the
sensor matching process.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. Under these conditions the TPMS
malfunction light (low tire warning light) comes on,
and at the same time the DIC message is
displayed. The DIC message and TPMS malfunction
light should go off once the TPMS sensors are
installed and the sensor matching process is
performed successfully.
6-64
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on
page 6-67.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate your vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires for signs of wear or damage.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6-66
for additional information.
If your vehicle has P235/50R18 size tires they
should be rotated any time you notice unusual
wear. Rotate the tires as soon as possible
and check wheel alignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time for
New Tires on page 6-66 and Wheel Replacement
on page 6-70.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label, see Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6-60 and Loading Your Vehicle
on page 5-22. Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) need the TPMS sensors
reset after a tire rotation is performed. A special tool
is needed to reset the sensor identification codes.
See your dealer/retailer for service. Make certain
that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See
Wheel Replacement on page 6-70 and “Wheel Nut
Torque” under Capacities and Specifications on
page 6-97.
{CAUTION:
When rotating P235/50R18 size tires, always use
the correct rotation pattern shown here.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause a crash. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
6-65
XLR-V Tires
Tire rotation is not recommended if your vehicle
has P235/45R19 size tires on the front axle
and P255/40R19 size tires on the rear axle.
Different tire sizes front to rear should not be
rotated.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
6-66
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance.
With proper care and maintenance tires will typically
wear out before they degrade due to age. If you
are unsure about the need to replace your tires as
they get older, consult the tire manufacturer for more
information.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for
mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 6-54, for additional information.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snow tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
(other than those originally installed on your
vehicle), brands, or types (radial and bias-belted
tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and
you could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes (other than those originally installed on
your vehicle), brands or types, may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type tires on all
four wheels.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the
tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
vehicle. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6-65.
6-67
Different Size Tires and Wheels
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on it. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning that is
higher or lower than the proper warning level you
would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 6-61.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 5-22, for more information about
the Tire and Loading Information label and its location
on your vehicle.
6-68
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes,
traction control, and electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 6-67 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 6-3 for additional information.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
6-69
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment might need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
6-70
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or
wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire clearance to
the body and chassis.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause a crash. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or the threads
of the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel nuts
might come loose and the wheel could fall off,
causing a crash.
6-71
Tightening Wheel Lug Nuts
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become
loose and even come off. This could lead to a
crash. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.
If you have to replace them, be sure to get new
GM original equipment wheel nuts.
6-72
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Tighten the wheel lug nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash. Use another type of traction device
only if its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on the
rear tires.
6-73
Lifting Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury.
The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
you or other people. You and they could be
badly injured. Find a level place to lift your
vehicle. To help prevent the vehicle from
moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move,
you can put blocks in front of and behind the
wheels.
6-74
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack,
you could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle or the
vehicle may fall and cause your or others
injury.
If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle, follow the
instructions that came with the jack, and be sure to use
the correct lifting points to avoid damaging your vehicle.
Lifting From the Front
Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. To lift your vehicle
properly, follow the advice in this part.
To help prevent vehicle damage:
• Be sure to place a block or pad between the
jack and the vehicle.
• Make sure the jack you are using spans at least
two crossmember ribs.
• Lift only in the areas shown in the following
pictures.
For additional information, see your GM dealer and
the Cadillac XLR service manual.
The front lifting points can be accessed from either side
of your vehicle, behind the front tires.
6-75
1. Locate the front lifting points (A), according to the
illustration shown.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
6-76
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B).
Lifting From the Rear
1. Locate the rear lifting points (A), according to the
illustration shown.
The rear lifting points can be accessed from the rear of
the vehicle, on either the driver’s or passenger’s side.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
6-77
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air
goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. See Tires on page 6-52 for additional
information.
Your vehicle, when new, had run-flat tires. This type of
tire can operate effectively with no air pressure, so
you will not need to stop on the side of the road
to change a flat tire. You can just keep on driving.
The shorter the distance you drive and the slower the
speed, the greater the chance that the run-flat tire
will not have to be replaced. Run-flat tires perform so
well without any air that a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
is used to alert you if a tire has lost pressure.
See Run-Flat Tires on page 6-58 and Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 6-61.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B).
For more information, see Doing Your Own Service
Work on page 6-4.
6-78
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When the TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55, REDUCED
HNDLG message is displayed on the Driver
Information Center, your vehicle’s handling
capabilities will be reduced during severe
maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you could
lose control of your vehicle. You or others
could be injured. Don’t drive over 55 mph
(90 km/h) when the TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,
REDUCED HNDLG message is displayed.
Drive cautiously and check your tire pressures
as soon as you can.
Special tools and procedures are required to
service a run-flat tire. If these special tools and
procedures are not used you or others could
be injured and your vehicle could be damaged.
Always be sure the proper tools and
procedures, as described in the service
manual, are used.
If the TPM system detects a tire pressure below
5 psi (34 kPa), the TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55, REDUCED
HNDLG warning message is displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-60 and DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-63 for information and details about the
DIC operation and displays.
Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tire
valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in your
vehicle’s run-flat tires. This damage would not
be covered by warranty. Do not use liquid sealants
in your vehicle’s run-flat tires.
To order a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 8-16.
If a tire goes flat, the stability control system will turn
on automatically even if it was disabled by the driver.
When a flat tire condition exists the StabiliTrak® system
cannot be turned off. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 5-8.
6-79
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
your upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of
heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
6-80
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats.
For soils, always try to remove them first with plain
water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as
much of the soil as possible using one of the following
techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
•
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
6-81
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never
use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces.
6-82
Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-11.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states
that is should not be used on plastic parts, do not
use it on your vehicle or damage may occur and
it would not be covered by the warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that
are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on
your vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 6-88. Follow all
manufacturers’ directions regarding correct product
usage, necessary safety precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
6-83
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6-83.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 6-88.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
6-84
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn
or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
•
•
•
•
Extreme dusty conditions
Sand and salt
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper removal
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Wheels and Trim
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
6-85
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
6-86
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in
your dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Fiberglass Springs
(Composite Springs)
Notice: If you use acidic or corrosive cleaning
products, engine degreasers or aluminum cleaning
agents on fiberglass springs, you may damage
the springs. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Use only approved cleaners
when cleaning your vehicle’s fiberglass springs.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
6-87
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
6-88
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls
and raised white lettering.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Description
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Wash Wax Concentrate
Spot Lifter
Odor Eliminator
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects tires. No wiping
necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the rear compartment cover in the
trunk. It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
The label has the following information:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. You can see it if you look through
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage would not be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-50.
6-89
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
A fuse powers the wiper motor. If the fuse blows, there
is an electrical problem. Be sure to have it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
6-90
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The panel fuse block is located on the passenger side
of the vehicle, under the instrument panel and under the
toe-board.
Remove the carpet and toe-board covering to access
the fuse block by pulling at the top of each corner
of the panel. Then turn the fuse block door knob
counterclockwise and pull the door to access the fuses.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
Spare Fuse
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
Spare Fuse
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
Spare Fuse
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
Spare Fuse
6-91
Fuses
Usage
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
REVERSE
LAMP
RUN/CRANK
Reverse Lamp
Starter/Crank
PRK/BRK
SOL A
Parking Brake Solenoid A
REVERSE
LAMPS
Reverse Lamps
BTSI SOL/
COL LOCK
BTSI Solenoid, Column Lock
Fuses
Usage
SDM/PSIR SW Airbags
EMPTY
Not Used
ONSTAR
OnStar®
ACCA/DRIV
DR SW
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),
Driver Door Switch
Power Tilt Wheel, Telescopic
TILT/TELE
Column, Memory Seat,
SW/MEM SEAT Steering
Seat Switch, Retractable
MOD/TOP SW Driver
Hardtop Switch
IGN SW/INTR
SNSR
Ignition Switch, Intrusion Sensor
STOP LAMP
Stop Lamp
GMLAN Devices
ISRVM/HVAC
Inside Rearview Mirror, Climate
Control System, Column Lock,
Power Sounder
RPA/H/C
SEAT/WPR
RELAYS
Rear Park Aid, Heated/Cooled
Seats, Windshield Wiper Relays
CLSTR/HUD
Instrument Panel Cluster, Head-Up
Display (HUD)
DR LOCKS
Door Locks
EMPTY
Not Used
EMPTY
Not Used
GMLAN
DEVICES
ECM
INTERIOR
LIGHTS
6-92
Engine Control Module
Interior Lights
RADIO/
S-BAND/VICS
Radio, S-Band, CD Changer
TUTD SW/
Tap-Up/Tap-Down Switch
STRG COL SW
HVAC/PWR
SND
Climate Control System, Power
Sounder
Fuses
REAR
FOG/ALDL
PWR FLDG
MIR-EXT/RET
DECK LID
CLOSE/
PRK/BRK B
Usage
Rear Fog Lamps, Diagnostic Link
Connector
Power Folding Mirror
Trunk Close Button, Parking Brake
Solenoid B
PWR SEAT
Power Seats
DR CNTRLS
Door Controls
RUN/ACSRY
PWR
Run, Accessory Power
EMPTY
Not Used
EMPTY
Not Used
WPR DWELL
STR WHL
DIMMING
Rainsense™
Steering Wheel Control Button
Lights
PWR LUMBAR Power Lumbar
LH/RH
HTD/SEAT RH Passenger Side Heated Seat
HTD/SEAT LH
Driver Side Heated Seat
Fuses
COLUMN
LK MDL
(EUROPE)
FOLDING
TOP/TRUNK
LATCH
AUX PWR
CIGAR LTR
Usage
Not Used
Retractable Hardtop, Trunk Latch
Auxiliary Power
Cigar Lighter
Relays
Usage
PRK/BRK
HOLD
Park Brake Hold
PRK/BRK
RELEASE
Park Brake Release
F/MIR
RETRACT
(EXPORT)
Not Used
FOG RR
(EUROPE)
Not Used
F/MIR EXTEND
Not Used
(EXPORT)
FUEL DR
Fuel Door
6-93
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block
is located next to the
engine on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
For more information on
location, see Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6-12.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
To access the fuses, push in the tab located at the end
of the fuse block cover. Then lift the cover open.
6-94
Fuses
Usage
1
Antilock Brake System, Electronic
Suspension Control, Adaptive
Forward Lighting System (AFS)
2
Horn
3
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),
Transmission Controls
4
Windshield Wipers
5
Stop/Back-Up Lamps
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
6
Oxygen Sensor
23
Right High Beam Headlamp
7
Battery 5
24
Left High Beam Headlamp
8
Parking Lamps
25
Cooling Fan
9
Electronic Throttle Control
26
Battery 3
10
Fuel Pump
27
Antilock Brakes
11
Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module
28
Climate Controls
29
Battery 2
12
Odd Injectors
30
Starter
13
Electronic Suspension Control
31
Audio Amplifier
14
Emission Controls
32
Not Used
15
Air Conditioning Compressor
33
Battery 1
16
Even Injectors
48
Spare
17
Windshield Washer, Adaptive
Forward Lighting System (AFS),
Intercooler Pump
49
Spare
50
Spare
18
Headlamp Washer
51
Spare
19
Right Low Beam Headlamp
52
Spare
20
Not Used
53
Not Used
21
Left Low Beam Headlamp
54
Fuse Puller
22
Fog Lamp
6-95
Relays
6-96
Usage
Relays
Usage
34
Horn
45
Windshield Wiper On/Off
35
Air Conditioning Compressor
46
Headlamp Washer
36
Windshield Washer
47
Low Beam Headlamps
37
Parking Lamps
55
Fuel Pump
38
Fog Lamps
39
High Beam Headlamps
40
Rear Window Defogger
41
Windshield Wiper High/Low
42
Wiper RUN/ACCESSORY Power
43
Starter/Crank
44
Ignition 1
Diodes
Usage
§
§
§
Diode 1
Wiper Diode
Diode 2
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-11 for more information.
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Capacities
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Automatic Transmission (Pan Removal and Replacement)
6.5 qt
6.2 L
Cooling System
6-Speed Automatic
12.6 qt
12.0 L
Engine Oil with Filter – 4.4L V8 and 4.6L V8 Engines
8.0 qt
7.6 L
Fuel Tank
18.0 gal
68.0 L
Intercooler System
2.4 qt
2.25 L
Wheel Nut Torque
100 ft lb
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
6-97
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
4.4L V8
D
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.02 mm)
4.6L V8
A
Automatic
0.050 inches (1.27 mm)
XLR-V Engine Data
Engine
Horsepower
Torque
Displacement
Compression Ratio
4.4L V8 (V-Series)
443 hp (330 kW) @
6400 rpm
414 lb ft (561 Nm) @
3900 rpm
4.4L
9.0:1
6-98
Section 7
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................7-2
Introduction ...................................................7-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................7-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................7-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................7-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................7-4
Additional Required Services ............................7-5
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................7-6
Owner Checks and Services ............................7-8
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................7-8
At Least Once a Month ...................................7-8
At Least Once a Year .....................................7-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............7-11
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........7-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................7-14
Maintenance Record .....................................7-15
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and
to keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure to
maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your
dealer/retailer for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by warranty.
7-2
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need
more frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 5-22.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 6-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 7-5 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 7-6 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the required
know-how and the proper tools and equipment
for the job. If you have any doubt, see your
dealer/retailer to have a qualified technician do
the work. See Doing Your Own Service Work on
page 6-4.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
dealer/retailer do these jobs.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 8-16.
Owner Checks and Services on page 7-8 tells you
what should be checked, when to check it, and what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7-11 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 7-13. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.
7-3
Scheduled Maintenance
To maintain the ride, handling, and performance of your
vehicle, it is important that the first tire rotation service be
performed when you notice unusual wear. Check tires for
inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 6-52. If
tire rotation is recommended for your vehicle, rotate tires.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6-65.
When the CHANGE OIL NOW message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate that
vehicle service is necessary for over a year. However,
your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once
a year and at this time the system must be reset. Your
dealer/retailer has trained service technicians who will
perform this work using genuine parts and reset the
system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 6-20 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
7-4
When the CHANGE OIL NOW message appears, the
following services, checks, and inspections are required:
❑ Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6-16. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil Life
System on page 6-20. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Visually check for any leaks or damage.
See footnote (a).
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6-22.
See footnote (h).
❑ Check tires for inflation pressures and wear. See Tires
on page 6-52. If tire rotation is recommended for your
vehicle, rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 6-65.
❑ Inspect brake system. See footnote (l).
❑ Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid
levels. If you have the 4.4L V8 supercharged engine,
check intercooler fluid level. Add fluid as needed.
❑ Perform any needed additional services. See
“Additional Required Services” in this section.
❑ Inspect suspension and steering components.
See footnote (n).
❑ Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (m).
❑ Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (b).
❑ Inspect restraint system components.
See footnote (c).
❑ Lubricate body components. See footnote (d).
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or
leaks.
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
•
150,000
(240 000)
•
•
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6-22.
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service).
See footnote (f).
125,000
(200 000)
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace passenger compartment air
filter. See footnote (e).
100,000
(160 000)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
•
•
•
•
•
7-5
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (g).
•
4.4L Supercharged Engine: Intercooler
system service (or every five years,
whichever occurs first). See footnote (k).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (j).
•
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(b) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 6-50 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on
page 6-85 for more information.
7-6
(c) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed
safety belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint
Systems on page 1-52.
(d) Lubricate the trunk key lock cylinder. Lubricate all
body door hinges. Lubricate all hinges and latches,
including those for the hood, trunk, console door, and
any folding seat hardware. More frequent lubrication may
be required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean
cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
(j) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
(e) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the
filter may require replacement more often.
(l) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc
brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition.
Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parking
brake, etc.
(f) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as high performance operation.
(g) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 6-24
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure
test the cooling system and pressure cap.
(h) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(k) Drain, flush, and refill intercooler system. This
service can be complex; you should have your
dealer/retailer perform this service. See Engine Coolant
on page 6-24 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean
pressure cap and filler neck. Pressure test the system
and pressure cap.
(m) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(n) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,
etc. XLR-V Only: Lubricate the outer ends of both
rear toe-links every other oil change.
7-7
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-11.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 6-16.
7-8
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 6-24.
Intercooler Coolant Level Check
(4.4L Supercharged Engine)
Check the coolant level and add DEX-COOL® coolant
mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant on page 6-24.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6-36.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inspection and Inflation Check
Inspect your vehicle’s tires for wear and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6-60.
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-30.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-30.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
3. With the engine off and without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer for service.
7-9
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
7-10
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Engine Oil
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard can be identified as
synthetic, and should also be
identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified
for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. However, not all synthetic
API oils with the starburst symbol
will meet this GM standard. Look
for and use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M. For the
proper viscosity, see Engine Oil on
page 6-16.
Usage
Intercooler
System
(4.4L V8
Supercharged
engine)
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
System
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering GM
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
XLR-V: Chassis
Lubrication
(Rear Toe-Link
Outer Ends)
Automatic
Transmission
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Engine Cooling water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
System
page 6-24.
7-11
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose
Trunk Key Lock Lubricant, Superlube
Cylinder
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Rear Axle
(Limited-Slip
Differential)
7-12
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115. With
a complete drain and refill add
4.7 ounces (140 ml) of Limited-Slip
Axle Lubricant Additive
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358, in
Canada 992694) where required.
See Rear Axle on page 6-46.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and
Door Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part Number
4.4 L V8 Engine
10342024
A2945C
4.6 L V8 Engine
25099149
A1208C
4.4 L V8 Engine
89017527
PF26
4.6 L V8 Engine
89017342
PF61
15848592
—
4.4 L V8 Engine
12592619
41-991
4.6 L V8 Engine
12571535
41-987
12367281
—
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Elements
Engine Oil Filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
Wiper Blade – 19.7 inches (50 cm)
7-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing
4.4L V8 Engine
4.6L V8 Engine
7-14
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 7-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 7-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
7-15
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
7-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
7-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
7-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
Section 8
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................8-2
Online Owner Center ......................................8-4
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................8-5
Customer Assistance Offices ............................8-5
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................8-7
Roadside Service ...........................................8-7
Scheduling Service Appointments ....................8-10
Courtesy Transportation .................................8-10
Collision Damage Repair ................................8-12
Reporting Safety Defects ................................8-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................8-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ................................8-15
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....8-16
Service Publications Ordering Information .........8-16
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................8-17
Event Data Recorders ...................................8-18
OnStar® ......................................................8-19
Navigation System ........................................8-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............8-19
8-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the general
manager.
8-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
United States, contact the Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center, 24 hours a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006.
In Canada, contact the Canadian Cadillac Customer
Communication Centre by calling 1-888-446-2000.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
STEP THREE (United States Owners): Both General
Motors and your dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle.
However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after
following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,
you should file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been
addressed after the following the procedure outlined in
Steps One and Two. General Motors of Canada Limited
wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge
mediation/Arbitration program. General Motors of
Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of
owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may
include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The
program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in approximately 70 days.
We believe our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
and free of charge.
8-3
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively you may call
the General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French),
or you may write to the Mediation/Arbitration Program
at the following address. Your inquiry should be
accompanied by your Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1–163–005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Online Owner Center
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
8-4
My GM Canada (Canada only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should be
addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
www.Cadillac.com
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
8-5
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
8-6
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Roadside Service
In the United States or Canada, call 1-800-882-1112.
Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only, call 1-888-889-2438.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Cadillac vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Cadillac Roadside
Service® program.
Who Is Covered?
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY)
users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY
users call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Service coverage is for the vehicle operator,
regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person driving
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is not
eligible for coverage.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up to a
maximum coverage of $100. These services are provided
at a nominal charge if the vehicle is no longer within the
Powertrain warranty.
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner
Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your Cadillac
Powertrain Warranty — 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km).
8-7
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
following situations:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in Canada). In Canada,
for safety reasons, propane and other alternative
fuels will not be provided through this service.
• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available
if you have an active OnStar® subscription.
To ensure security, the driver must present personal
identification before lock-out service is provided.
In Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty
service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling crash.
Winch-out assistance is provided when the vehicle is
mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
charge if the vehicle does not start.
8-8
• Trip Routing Service: Upon request, Cadillac
Roadside Service will send you detailed, computer
personalized maps, highlighting your choice of either
the most direct route or the most scenic route to your
destination, anywhere in North America, along with
helpful travel information pertaining to your trip.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. In Canada, trip routing requests
will be limited to six per calendar year.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental
expenses may be reimbursed during the 60 months/
100,000 miles (160 000 km) warranty period. Items
covered are hotel, meals, and rental car.
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There may be
times when Roadside Service cannot provide timely
assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you will
be reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Cadillac Roadside Service®.
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or
driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims become
excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
Cadillac Technician Roadside Service
(U.S. only)
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner in the United States with the advantage of
contacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available,
a Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide
on-site service.
A dealer technician will travel to your location within a
30 mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.
If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your
car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership. Each
technician travels with a specially equipped service
vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts
and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
Calling for Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside Service
Representative:
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Service coverage
are towing or services for vehicles operated on a
non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound towing
caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State, Provincial
or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or changing of
snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Roadside Service is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Service program at any time without
notification.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
8-9
Scheduling Service Appointments
Courtesy Transportation
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early
in the work day as possible to allow for the same
day repair.
8-10
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair. If
you obtain a rental vehicle on your own, please see your
dealer for the maximum number of days allowed and the
allowance per rental day. Rental reimbursement must be
supported by original receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement and meet state, local,
and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements
vary and may include minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible
for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip
shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km)
from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the dealer’s shuttle
service, the expense must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount
allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement
of fuel or other transportation costs.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
8-11
Additional Program Information
Collision Parts
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
8-12
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
If a Crash Occurs
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage
is not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are
all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no
one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until
all matters have been taken care of. Move
your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger
or you are instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Service on page 8-7 for
more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
8-13
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of
the damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer/retailer
or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
with their work for a long time.
8-14
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by
your GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have
the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if
your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) immediately, in addition
to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation. If it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can obtain information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
8-15
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000, or write:
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
Service Publications Ordering
Information
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Service Manuals
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
8-16
Current and Past Model Order Forms
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a
crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to
help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may
store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
consumption or average speed. These modules may also
retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
8-17
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
8-18
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have
the special equipment, can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if
the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee;
in response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
OnStar®
®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to
the OnStar® services, please refer to the OnStar® Terms
and Conditions for information on data collection and
use. See also OnStar® System on page 2-41 in
this manual for more information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
8-19
✍ NOTES
8-20
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 6-3
Adaptive Cruise Control ................................... 3-15
Adaptive Forward Lighting System ..................... 3-30
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-51
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 6-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 6-89
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 6-22
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-38
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-47
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-46
Airbag System ................................................ 1-36
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-44
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-41
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-39
Airbag Systems
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-51
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-43
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-45
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-50
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-43
Antenna, Diversity Antenna System ................... 3-85
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System ...................................................... 3-85
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 5-5
Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ................ 3-51
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 6-85
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 6-83
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 6-87
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 6-84
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 6-81
Fiberglass Springs ....................................... 6-87
Finish Care ................................................. 6-84
Finish Damage ............................................ 6-87
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 6-82
Interior Cleaning .......................................... 6-80
Leather ...................................................... 6-82
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 6-86
Speaker Covers .......................................... 6-82
Tires .......................................................... 6-86
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 6-87
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 6-88
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 6-83
Weatherstrips .............................................. 6-83
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 6-85
Wood Panels .............................................. 6-82
1
Appointments, Scheduling Service .....................
Ashtray .........................................................
Audio System ......................................... 3-81,
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Diversity Antenna System .............................
Radio Reception ..........................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............
Automatic Door Lock .......................................
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
Avoid Point/Area, Edit ......................................
8-10
3-37
4-54
3-82
3-85
3-85
3-85
3-84
3-82
3-85
2-12
6-24
2-26
4-26
B
Battery .......................................................... 6-40
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-32
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-33
Brake
Emergencies ................................................ 5-5
Brakes .......................................................... 6-37
System Warning Light .................................. 3-50
2
Braking ........................................................... 5-4
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 5-5
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-23
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 6-50
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 6-47
Buying New Tires ........................................... 6-67
C
California Fuel .................................................. 6-6
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ....... 6-4
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 6-3
Canadian Owners ............................................... iii
Capacities and Specifications ............................ 6-97
Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-13, 2-34, 5-17, 5-27
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 6-83
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-85
Your CDs ................................................... 3-85
CD
Six-Disc Changer ......................................... 4-67
CD/DVD Player .............................................. 4-70
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-52
Chains, Tire ................................................... 6-73
Charging System Light .................................... 3-49
Check
Engine Light ...............................................
Checking Things Under the Hood ......................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...................................
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ...............................
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..........
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ...................................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ..............
Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................................
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................
Fiberglass Springs .......................................
Finish Care .................................................
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .......................................
Interior .......................................................
Leather ......................................................
Speaker Covers ..........................................
Tires ..........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................
3-54
6-10
6-87
1-30
1-26
1-32
1-23
1-32
3-37
6-85
6-84
6-81
6-87
6-84
6-82
6-80
6-82
6-82
6-86
6-87
6-83
Cleaning (cont.)
Weatherstrips .............................................. 6-83
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 6-85
Wood Panels .............................................. 6-82
Climate Control System
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-42
Dual .......................................................... 3-38
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-42
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 8-12
Competitive Driving, Racing or Other ................. 5-13
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 5-3
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-53
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-53
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 6-27
Cooled Seats ................................................... 1-3
Cooling System .............................................. 6-30
Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-32
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-12
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-52
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation ................................ 8-10
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 8-5
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 8-5
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 8-2
3
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 8-7
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 8-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 8-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 8-15
Roadside Service .......................................... 8-7
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 8-16
D
Database Coverage Explanations ...................... 4-53
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-29
Defensive Driving ............................................. 5-2
Diversity Antenna System ................................. 3-85
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 6-4
Door
Automatic Door Lock .................................... 2-12
Locks ........................................................ 2-10
Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-12
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 2-12
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-60
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-60
DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-76
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-63
Other Messages .......................................... 3-74
4
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 5-14
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 5-15
Defensive ..................................................... 5-2
Drunken ....................................................... 5-2
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 5-16
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 5-16
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 5-14
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 5-22
Winter ........................................................ 5-17
Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-38
DVD, CD Player ............................................. 4-70
E
Edit
Avoid Point/Area ..........................................
Memory Point .............................................
Waypoint ....................................................
EDR .............................................................
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ......................................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block .........................
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......
Underhood Fuse Block .................................
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................
4-26
4-20
4-24
8-17
6-89
6-90
6-90
6-90
6-94
6-90
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............
Coolant ......................................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ...........................
Drive Belt Routing .......................................
Engine Compartment Overview ......................
Exhaust .....................................................
Oil .............................................................
Oil Life System ...........................................
Oil Pressure Gage .......................................
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ...........
Overheating ................................................
Running While Parked ..................................
Starting ......................................................
Enter Destination ............................................
Entry/Exit Lighting ...........................................
Event Data Recorders .....................................
Extender, Safety Belt .......................................
Exterior Lamps ...............................................
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ..........................
6-22
3-54
6-24
3-53
7-14
6-12
2-34
6-16
6-20
3-57
6-29
6-27
2-35
2-24
4-28
3-32
8-18
1-23
3-28
3-32
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 6-22
Finish Damage ............................................... 6-87
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 6-78
Floor Mats ..................................................... 2-52
Fluid ............................................................. 6-24
Power Steering ........................................... 6-35
Windshield Washer ...................................... 6-36
Fog Lamp
Fog ........................................................... 3-30
Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-58
Fuel ............................................................... 6-5
Additives ...................................................... 6-6
California Fuel .............................................. 6-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 6-10
Filling the Tank ............................................. 6-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 6-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-59
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 6-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 6-5
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 6-90
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 6-90
Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 6-94
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 6-90
5
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-53
Engine Oil Pressure ..................................... 3-57
Fuel .......................................................... 3-59
Speedometer .............................................. 3-45
Tachometer ................................................. 3-45
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-50
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-44
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 6-5
Specifications ............................................... 6-5
Getting Started
Getting Started, Navigation ............................. 4-4
Global Positioning System (GPS) ...................... 4-50
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-52
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 8-7
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 6-47
Vertical Aiming ............................................ 6-48
6
Headlamps
Adaptive Forward Lighting System ................. 3-30
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 6-50
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-29
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-28
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9
On Reminder .............................................. 3-29
Washer ...................................................... 3-12
Wiper Activated ........................................... 3-29
Head-Up Display (HUD) ................................... 3-33
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3
Heated Steering Wheel ..................................... 3-7
Heater ........................................................... 3-38
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-58
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 5-16
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 5-16
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 6-10
Release ..................................................... 6-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-11
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-23
Immobilizer .................................................... 2-21
Immobilizer Operation ...................................... 2-22
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-26
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 6-60
Instrument Panel
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness .................................................. 3-32
Cluster ....................................................... 3-44
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 6-41
K
Keyless Access System ............................. 2-5, 4-50
Keyless Access System, Operation ...................... 2-6
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .....................................
Lamps
Courtesy ....................................................
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ......................
Reading .....................................................
Twilight Sentinel® ........................................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ...........................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Lifting Your Vehicle, Tires .................................
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................
Antilock Brake System Warning .....................
Brake System Warning .................................
Charging System .........................................
Fog Lamp ..................................................
Highbeam On .............................................
Lights On Reminder .....................................
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................
Safety Belt Reminders ..................................
Security .....................................................
TCS Warning Light ......................................
Tire Pressure ..............................................
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ..........
6-54
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-31
1-20
1-32
6-74
3-46
3-51
3-50
3-49
3-58
3-58
3-58
3-54
3-47
3-46
3-58
3-52
3-53
3-52
7
Lighting
Entry/Exit ................................................... 3-32
Lights
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-28
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9
On Reminder .............................................. 3-29
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ....................................... 5-7
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 5-22
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-12
Locks
Automatic Door Lock .................................... 2-12
Door .......................................................... 2-10
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12
Power Door ................................................ 2-12
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 2-12
Loss of Control ............................................... 5-12
Lowering the Retractable Hardtop ...................... 2-54
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-2
8
M
Magnetic Ride Control ....................................... 5-7
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 7-5
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 7-8
At Least Once a Month .................................. 7-8
At Least Once a Year .................................... 7-9
Introduction .................................................. 7-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 7-6
Maintenance Record .................................... 7-15
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 7-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 7-13
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 7-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 7-11
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 7-4
Using .......................................................... 7-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 7-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-54
Manual, Using .................................................... iv
Maps ............................................................ 4-39
Memory Point, Edit ......................................... 4-20
Memory Seat, Mirrors, Steering Wheel Controls .... 1-3
Menu
Setup ........................................................ 4-13
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-63
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar® ..... 2-36
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-37
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-38
Outside Power Heated Mirrors ....................... 2-36
Park Assist ................................................. 2-37
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 8-4
N
Navigation ................................................. 4-2, 4-4
Using the System ........................................ 4-11
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 8-19
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-23
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 7-13
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-45
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-45
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 5-11
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 6-16
Engine Oil Pressure Gage ............................ 3-57
Life Indicator ............................................... 3-80
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 6-20
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-23
Online Owner Center ........................................ 8-4
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 8-19
OnStar® System ............................................. 4-50
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-41
Operation, Universal Home Remote System ........ 2-45
Ordering
Map DVDs ................................................. 4-53
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-42
Outlets
Accessory Power ......................................... 3-36
Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-37
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-38
Power Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-36
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ... 6-29
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 7-8
Owners, Canadian .............................................. iii
9
P
Paint, Damage ............................................... 6-87
Park Aid ........................................................ 2-38
Park Assist Mirror ........................................... 2-37
Park Brake .................................................... 2-30
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-32
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-33
Parking
Assist ........................................................ 2-38
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-34
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-47
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-42
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-45
Passing ......................................................... 5-12
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 6-4
Plan Route .................................................... 4-19
Power
Door Locks ................................................. 2-12
Electrical System ......................................... 6-90
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-2
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-24
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 6-35
Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column ....... 3-7
Windows .................................................... 2-17
10
Privacy ..........................................................
Event Data Recorders ..................................
Navigation System .......................................
OnStar .......................................................
Radio Frequency Identification .......................
Problems with Route Guidance .........................
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ...............
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-19
8-19
4-52
2-12
R
Racing or Other Competitive Driving .................. 5-13
Radio ............................................................ 4-54
Personalization with Home and
Away Feature .......................................... 4-75
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID),
Privacy ...................................................... 8-19
Radios .......................................................... 3-81
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-85
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-85
Reception ................................................... 3-84
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-82
Rainsense™ Wipers ........................................ 3-11
Raising the Retractable Hardtop ........................ 2-55
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-32
Rear Axle ...................................................... 6-46
Limited-Slip .................................................. 5-7
Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-53
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming
with OnStar® .............................................. 2-36
Reclining Seatbacks, Power ............................... 1-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 7-11
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 5-27
Remote, Keyless Access System ................ 2-5, 4-50
Replacement, Windshield ................................. 6-50
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 8-15
General Motors ........................................... 8-16
United States Government ............................ 8-15
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-52
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-53
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-24
Retractable Hardtop ........................................ 2-54
Lowering .................................................... 2-54
Raising ...................................................... 2-55
Roadside
Service ........................................................ 8-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 5-22
Route Preference ............................................ 4-37
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 7-14
Run-Flat Tires ................................................ 6-58
Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-35
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-46
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 6-83
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-11
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-20
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-23
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-22
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-6
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iv
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 7-4
Seats
Heated and Cooled Seats .............................. 1-3
Memory, Mirrors ............................................ 1-3
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-2
Power Reclining Seatbacks ............................. 1-4
Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Securing a Child Restraint
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-32
Security Light ................................................. 3-58
Service ........................................................... 6-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 6-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle .......................................... 6-4
11
Service (cont.)
California Pershlorate Materials Requirements ... 6-4
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 6-3
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 6-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-54
Publications Ordering Information ................... 8-16
Service, Scheduling Appointments ..................... 8-10
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-50
Setup Menu ................................................... 4-13
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 6-86
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-32
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-33
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Six-Disc CD Changer ...................................... 4-67
Specifications, Capacities ................................. 6-97
Speedometer .................................................. 3-45
StabiliTrak® System .......................................... 5-8
Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-24
Steering .......................................................... 5-9
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-82
Steering Wheel Controls, Memory ....................... 1-3
Steering Wheel, Heated ..................................... 3-7
Steering Wheel, Power Tilt Wheel and
Telescopic Steering Column ............................ 3-7
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-52
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-53
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-52
Glove Box .................................................. 2-52
Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-53
12
Storage Areas (cont.)
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 5-21
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-19
Symbols ........................................................ 4-44
System Needs Service, If ................................. 4-52
System Overview
Overview, Navigation System .......................... 4-2
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-45
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-52
Telescopic Steering Column, Power Tilt Wheel ...... 3-7
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-82
Theft-Deterrent System .................................... 2-19
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-19
Immobilizer ................................................. 2-21
Immobilizer Operation ................................... 2-22
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-53
Tires ............................................................. 6-52
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ................................................. 6-85
Buying New Tires ........................................ 6-67
Chains ....................................................... 6-73
Cleaning .................................................... 6-86
Different Size .............................................. 6-68
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 6-78
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 6-60
Tires (cont.)
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 6-65
Lifting Your Vehicle ...................................... 6-74
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 6-63
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 6-61
Run-Flat ..................................................... 6-58
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 6-54
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 6-56
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 6-69
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 6-70
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 6-70
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 6-66
Winter Tires ................................................ 6-53
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 5-27
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 5-27
Your Vehicle ............................................... 5-27
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 5-6
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-52
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .................................... 5-7
Traction (cont.)
Magnetic Ride Control ................................... 5-7
StabiliTrak® System ....................................... 5-8
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 6-24
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-26
Trip Computer
Oil Life Indicator .......................................... 3-80
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-45
Trunk ............................................................ 2-13
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-8
Twilight Sentinel® ............................................ 3-31
U
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............... 2-38
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 6-69
Universal Home Remote System ....................... 2-44
Operation ................................................... 2-45
Using this Manual ............................................... iv
13
V
Valet Lockout Switch ....................................... 2-21
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 5-3
Damage Warnings ............................................ v
Loading ...................................................... 5-22
Symbols ......................................................... v
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 8-17
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 6-89
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 6-89
Vehicle Personalization
DIC ........................................................... 3-76
Vehicle Positioning .......................................... 4-51
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-42
Visors ........................................................... 2-19
Voice Recognition ........................................... 4-76
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-50
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-43
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-63
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iv
Vehicle Damage ............................................... v
14
Washer, Headlamps ........................................
Waypoint, Edit ................................................
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..........................
Different Size ..............................................
Replacement ...............................................
Windows .......................................................
Power ........................................................
Windshield
Rainsense™ Wipers .....................................
Replacement ...............................................
Washer ......................................................
Washer Fluid ..............................................
Wiper Blade Replacement .............................
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................
Wiper Fuses ...............................................
Wipers .......................................................
Winter Driving ................................................
Winter Tires ...................................................
Wiper Activated Headlamps ..............................
3-12
4-24
6-70
6-68
6-70
2-16
2-17
3-11
6-50
3-12
6-36
6-50
6-85
6-90
3-10
5-17
6-53
3-29
X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-85
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 7-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement